‫ﺭﺍﻫﻨﻤﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻣﻊ‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫‪LT‬‬ ‫‪X‬‬ ‫‪E‬‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﻀﯽ ﺍﺑﻄﺤﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﻀﻮ ﻫﯿٔﺎﺕ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﻋﻠﻮﻡ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺩﺍﻣﻐﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺶﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﯾﺎﺯﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺳﯿﺰﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۱.۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲.۱‬‬ ‫‪ TEX‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫‪۳.۱‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻦ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ٔ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫‪۱.۳.۱‬‬ ‫‪۴.۱‬‬ ‫‪۲.۳.۱‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪۳.۳.۱‬‬ ‫ﯼ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩ ِ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫‪۴.۳.۱‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺧﯿﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪. . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪۵.۳.۱‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍ ‪LaTEX‬؟‬ ‫‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱۶‬‬ ‫‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪۵.۱‬‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱۹‬‬ ‫‪۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲۲‬‬ ‫‪۱.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲۲‬‬ ‫‪۲.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲۴‬‬ ‫‪۳.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲۹‬‬ ‫‪۴.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳۳‬‬ ‫‪۵.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳۷‬‬ ‫‪۶.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴۲‬‬ ‫‪۷.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﯾﺮ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴۸‬‬ ‫‪۸.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴۹‬‬ ‫‪۹.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵۷‬‬ ‫‪۱.۷.۱‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞِ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵۸‬‬ ‫‪۲.۷.۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۶۱‬‬ ‫‪۳.۷.۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ Times‬ﻭ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪۶۳‬‬ ‫‪۸.۱‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺁﻥ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۶۷‬‬ ‫‪۹.۱‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۶۹‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۰.۱‬ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۷۲‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۱.۱‬ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۷۵‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪۷۹‬‬ ‫‪۷.۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫‪۱.۲‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۷۹‬‬ ‫‪۱.۱.۲‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۸۰‬‬ ‫‪۲.۱.۲‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑﻫﺎ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۸۱‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫ﺳﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﻫﺎ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۸۲‬‬ ‫‪۳.۱.۲‬‬ ‫‪۲.۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۸۳‬‬ ‫‪۳.۲‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺗٔﺎﮐﯿﺪ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۹۰‬‬ ‫‪۴.۲‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۹۳‬‬ ‫‪۱.۴.۲‬‬ ‫ﻭﺳﻂﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۹۳‬‬ ‫‪۲.۴.۲‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﭼﭗ ﯾﺎ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۹۴‬‬ ‫‪۳.۴.۲‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ ‪. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۹۶‬‬ ‫‪۴.۴.۲‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﻌﺮ ‪۱۰۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵.۴.۲‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ‪۱۰۱ . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵.۲‬‬ ‫‪۶.۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﺑﻨﺪﯼ ‪۱۰۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۵.۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻪﻫﻢﺭﯾﺨﺘﻪ ‪۱۰۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۵.۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﯽ ‪۱۱۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۵.۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﯽ ‪۱۱۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴.۵.۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ‪۱۱۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۱۱۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۶.۲‬‬ ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۱۲۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۶.۲‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺟﺪﺍﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ‪۱۲۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۶.۲‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪۱۲۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴.۶.۲‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺮ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ؟ ‪۱۲۹ .‬‬ ‫‪۵.۶.۲‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺍﺩﻏﺎﻡ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ؟ ‪۱۳۱ . .‬‬ ‫‪۶.۶.۲‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪۱۳۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . array‬‬ ‫‪۷.۶.۲‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ‪۱۳۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۷.۲‬‬ ‫ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﯽ ‪۱۴۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۸.۲‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ‪۱۴۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫ﭼﻬﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪۹.۲‬‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪۱۴۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۹.۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﯽﺩﺭﭘﯽ ‪۱۴۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۹.۲‬‬ ‫‪۱۴۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺟﺪﺍﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﭘﯽﺩﺭﭘﯽ‬ ‫‪۱۴۹‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ‬ ‫‪۱.۳‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ‪۱۵۰ . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ِ‬ ‫‪۲.۳‬‬ ‫ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ‪۱۵۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎ ‪۱۵۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ‬ ‫‪۵.۳‬‬ ‫‪۱۵۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﯾﻮﻧﺎﻧﯽ ‪۱۵۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﯾﺲ ‪۱۵۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺭﯾﺸﻪ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺩﯾﮑﺎﻝ ‪۱۵۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﻭﺩﻭﯾﯽ ﻭ ﺭ ﻭﺍﺑﻂ ﺩﻭﺩﻭﯾﯽ‬ ‫‪۱۵۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﮐﺴﺮﻫﺎ ‪۱۶۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۶.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﮐﺴﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪﺩﺍﺭ ‪۱۶۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۷.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ‪ m‬ﺷﯽﺀ ﺍﺯ ‪ n‬ﺷﯽﺀ ‪۱۶۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۸.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﮐﺴﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻌﻤﯿﻢ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ‪۱۶۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۹.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﺗﺮﯾﺲﻫﺎ ‪۱۶۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱۰.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎ ‪۱۶۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱۱.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﻧﻘﻄﻪﻫﺎ ‪۱۷۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱۲.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺩﯾﺎﮔﺮﺍﻡﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﺑﺠﺎﯾﯽ ‪۱۷۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱۳.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﮕﺮﺍﻝ ‪۱۷۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱۴.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﺑﻊ ﭼﻨﺪﺿﺎﺑﻄﻪﺍﯼ ‪۱۷۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱۵.۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ‪۱۷۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﭼﯿﺪﻥ ﻋﻼﯾﻢ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻫﻢ ‪۱۷۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﭘﻨﺞ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪۶.۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪۱۸۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۷.۳‬‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮕﺮﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺣﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ‪۱۸۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۸.۳‬‬ ‫‪۹.۳‬‬ ‫‪۱.۷.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﻞ ﺟﺎﯼﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺣﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﻭ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ‪۱۸۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۷.۳‬‬ ‫‪۱۸۹ .‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺪ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺪ ﺑﺎﻻ ﯾﮏ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﻄﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ‪۱۹۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۸.۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺟﺰﺍﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﯾﮏ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ‪۱۹۰ . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۸.۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ‪۱۹۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۸.۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﻫﺎ ‪۱۹۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ‪۱۹۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۹.۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﺍﯾﺴﺘﺎﺩﻩ ‪۲۰۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۹.۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﺳﯿﺎﻩ ‪۲۰۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۹.۳‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ‪۲۰۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۰.۳‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ‪۲۰۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۱.۳‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻫﯽ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ‪۲۰۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۲.۳‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪﺧﻄﯽ ﻭ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻫﯽ ‪۲۱۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۱۲.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﯼ ﯾﮏ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ‪۲۱۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۱۲.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ‪۲۱۱ . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۱۲.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﯼ ﭼﻨﺪ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ‪۲۱۳ . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴.۱۲.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻫﯽ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ‪۲۱۴ . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵.۱۲.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻫﯽ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ‪۲۱۵ . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۶.۱۲.۳‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ‪ \tag‬ﻭ ‪۲۱۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \notag‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۳.۳‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ‪۲۱۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۱۳.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻤﻮﻣﯽ ‪۲۱۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۱۳.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪۲۲۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . multline‬‬ ‫ﺷﺶ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪۳.۱۳.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪۲۲۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . split‬‬ ‫‪۴.۱۳.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪۲۲۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . gather‬‬ ‫‪۵.۱۳.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪۲۲۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . align‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۴.۳‬ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ‪۲۲۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۱۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪۲۲۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \newtheorem‬‬ ‫‪۲.۱۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﺼﯿﻪﻫﺎ ‪۲۳۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۱۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪ ‪۲۳۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴.۱۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪theorem‬‬ ‫‪۲۳۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵.۱۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪۲۳۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . theorem‬‬ ‫‪۶.۱۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪۲۳۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . amsthm‬‬ ‫‪۷.۱۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪۲۴۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . amsthm‬‬ ‫‪۸.۱۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪۲۴۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . amsthm‬‬ ‫‪۹.۱۴.۳‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ‪۲۴۴ . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۰.۱۴.۳‬ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪۲۴۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . proof‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۱.۱۴.۳‬ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪۲۴۸ . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪ ۱۵.۳‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪ amsmath‬ﻭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺁﻥ ‪۲۴۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪۱.۴‬‬ ‫‪۲۵۳‬‬ ‫ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ‪۲۵۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۱.۴‬‬ ‫ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ‪ report ،book‬ﻭ ‪۲۵۴ . . . . . . . . . article‬‬ ‫‪۲.۱.۴‬‬ ‫ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ‪۲۵۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . letter‬‬ ‫‪۳.۱.۴‬‬ ‫ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ‪۲۵۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . slides‬‬ ‫‪۲.۴‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪۲۶۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۴‬‬ ‫ﭼﮑﯿﺪﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ‪۲۶۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﻫﻔﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪۴.۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﺑﻨﺪﯼ ‪۲۶۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵.۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ ‪۲۶۷ . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۶.۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﻭ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎﻣﻪ ‪۲۷۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۷.۴‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫‪۱.۶.۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪۲۷۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . thebibliography‬‬ ‫‪۲.۶.۴‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ ﮐﻤﮑﯽ ‪ BibTEX‬ﻭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎﻣﻪﺍﯼ ‪۲۷۴ . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪﺳﺎﺯﯼ ‪۲۸۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪۱.۵‬‬ ‫‪۲۹۳‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪۲۹۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \documentclass‬‬ ‫‪۱.۱.۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪۲۹۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۱.۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪۲۹۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۱.۵‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪۲۹۶ . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴.۱.۵‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﯾﮑﺮ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ‪۲۹۷ . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵.۱.۵‬‬ ‫ﻞ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪۲۹۸ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﺁﻏﺎﺯﯾﻦِ ﻓﺼ ِ‬ ‫‪۶.۱.۵‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪۲۹۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۷.۱.۵‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ‪۲۹۹ . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۳۰۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ‪۳۰۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴.۵‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪۳۰۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . geometry‬‬ ‫‪۱.۴.۵‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪۳۰۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . geometry‬‬ ‫‪۲.۴.۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪۳۰۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۴.۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺟﻬﺖ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ ‪۳۰۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴.۴.۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺑﺪﻧﻪﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪۳۰۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵.۴.۵‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎ ‪۳۱۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﻫﺸﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪۶.۴.۵‬‬ ‫‪۵.۵‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ‪۳۱۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۶.۵‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪۳۱۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fancyhdr‬‬ ‫‪۷.۵‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪۳۱۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۶.۵‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﯾﮏﺭ ﻭ ‪۳۱۷ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۶.۵‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ ‪۳۱۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۶.۵‬‬ ‫ﻒ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪۳۲۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾ ِ‬ ‫‪۴.۶.۵‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ‪۳۲۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . fancy‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ‪۳۲۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳۲۹‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬ ‫‪۱.۶‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ‪۳۲۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۶‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ‪۳۳۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۶‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪۳۳۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . graphicx‬‬ ‫‪۴.۶‬‬ ‫‪۵.۶‬‬ ‫‪۱.۳.۶‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪۳۳۴ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \includegraphics‬‬ ‫‪۲.۳.۶‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﭘﻬﻨﺎ ﻭ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬ ‫‪۳۳۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۳.۶‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪۳۳۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴.۳.۶‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪۳۳۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵.۳.۶‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺵ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪۳۴۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۶.۳.۶‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﻫﻢﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﭘﻬﻨﺎ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍﯼ ﺁﻥ ‪۳۴۱ . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺧﺶ ﻭ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ‪۳۴۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۴.۶‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \scalebox‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ‪۳۴۵ . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۴.۶‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \resizebox‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ‪۳۴۶ . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۴.۶‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \rotatebox‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﺮﺧﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ‪۳۴۷ . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪۳۵۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫ﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫‪۶.۶‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ minipage‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺎﯼﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ‪۳۵۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۷.۶‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪۳۵۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . \includegraphics‬‬ ‫‪۳۵۹‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ‬ ‫‪۱.۷‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪ ‪۳۵۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۷‬‬ ‫ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪۳۶۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۲.۷‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪۳۶۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۲.۲.۷‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪۳۶۲ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۲.۷‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ‪۳۶۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۷‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻨﺎﻭﺭ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪۳۶۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . float‬‬ ‫‪۴.۷‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺯﯾﺮﻧﻮﯾﺲﻫﺎ ‪۳۷۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۱.۴.۷‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪۳۷۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . caption‬‬ ‫‪۲.۴.۷‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﺯﯾﺮﻧﻮﯾﺲ ‪۳۷۶ . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳.۴.۷‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ‪۳۷۹ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۴.۴.۷‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪۳۸۰ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫‪۵.۴.۷‬‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎ ‪۳۸۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ‬ ‫‪۳۸۳‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ ۱.‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ‪۳۸۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ‪ ۲.‬ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ‪۳۹۱ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺏ‬ ‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﯼ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫‪۳۹۳‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪۱.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ‪۳۹۳ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MiKTEX‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪۲.‬‬ ‫ﻧﺼﺐ ﻭ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﯼ ‪۳۹۵ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MiKTEX‬‬ ‫ﺏ‪۳.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﯾﺎﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺼﺐ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻤﺒﻮﺩ ‪۳۹۶ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .‬‬ ‫ﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‬ ‫ﮐﺘﺎﺏﻧﺎﻣﻪ‬ ‫‪۳۹۹‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ‬ ‫‪۴۰۵‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ ‪۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﻔﺎﻫﯿﻢ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺍﺳﺎ ِ‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺁ ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﯽﺁﻭﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﻧﺒﺎﻝ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪﯼ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺳﻮﺩﻣﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱.۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎﺭﯾﺨﭽﻪﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩﯼ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺻ‰ﻨ‰ﻌ‰ﺖ ﭼ‰ﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﯾ‰ﮏ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺏ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻧ‰ﺴ‰ﺨ‰ﻪﺑ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﺩﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﯽ ﭘ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﯽﺁﻣ‰ﺪ ﻭ ﺍﻧ‰ﺘ‰ﺸ‰ﺎﺭ ﻣ‰ﯽﯾ‰ﺎﻓ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﻧ‰ﺴ‰ﺨ‰ﻪﺑ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﮐ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺳ‰ﺨ‰ﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺷ‰ﻮﺍﺭ ﺑ‰ﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣ‰ﺎﻩﻫ‰ﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﺳﺎﻝﻫﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﺸﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﺯﯾﺎﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺟﻠﺪ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﺨﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺷﮕﻔﺖﺁﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺗﺤﺴﯿﻦ ﺑﺮﺍﻧﮕﯿﺰ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ۱۴۴۰‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﮑﺎﻣﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭼﻬﺎﺭ ﺩﻭﺭﻩ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱‬‬ ‫‪۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻩﯼ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ‪ ۱۴۵۰‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ﺍﯾﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻧﻘﺶ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺑﺮ ﺍﺟﺴﺎﻡ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﻨﺪﻩﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﭙﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺭﯾﺨﺘﻦ ﻓﻠﺰ ﻣﺬﺍﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﻨﺪﻩﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﺗﺎ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑﻫﺎ ﺷﮑﻞ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ ﺁﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﺑﺮﮒ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﻋﻤﻞ ﭼﯿﺪﻥ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐﻨﺎﺭ ﻫﻢ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻋﻤﻞ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻧﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﻣﺪﺗﯽ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻋﺶ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﺍﯼ ﻧﺒﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﯾﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻏﺮﺿﯽ ﮐﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺵ ﺑﻪ ﺳﺮﻣﺎﯾﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﺭﺳﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺎ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ۱۴۵۴‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺍﻧﺒﻮﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﯿﻞ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﯿﺖ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ﻣﻮﻓﻘﯿﺖ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﻣﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ﺗﺎ ﻗﺮﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺩﻫﻪﻫﺎ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺳﺮﻋﺖ‬ ‫ﺷﮕﻔﺖﺍﻧﮕﯿﺰﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮ ﺍﺭ ﻭﭘﺎ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺵ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﭘﻨﺠﺎﻩ ﺳﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫﺰﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﯾﺴﺖ ﺷﻬﺮ ﺍﺭ ﻭﭘﺎ ﺩﺭ ﭼﺎﭘﺨﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩ ﻣﻬﺎﺭﺕ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻣﺮﺩﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻮﺩﻧﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻧﺎﭼﯿﺰﯼ ﭘﻮﻝ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻩﯼ ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ‪ ۱۸۷۰‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻘﻼﺏ ﺻﻨﻌﺘﯽ ﻧﻮﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﯿﺮ ﻭﯼ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺣﺮﮐﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﺍﻧﯽ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ ﺩﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺑﺨﺎﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﮔﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﺎﻫﺶ ‪ ۸۵‬ﺩﺭﺻﺪﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺎﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻩﯼ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻋﮑﺴﺒﺮﺩﺍﺭﯼ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ‪ ۱۹۶۰‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ۱۹۶۰‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ﺟﻬﺶ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻮﺟﻬﯽ ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺻﻨﻌﺖ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﺩﻭﺭﺑﯿﻦ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ TEX ۲.۱‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟‬ ‫‪۳‬‬ ‫ﺗ‰ﺼ‰ﻮ ﯾ‰ﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺻ‰ﻔ‰ﺤ‰ﻪﯼ ﻣ‰ﻮﺭﺩ ﻧ‰ﻈ‰ﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺎ ﺍﻧ‰ﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺩﻟ‰ﺨ‰ﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓ‰ﺮﺍﻫ‰ﻢ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﻓ‰ﯿ‰ﻠ‰ﻢ ﺣ‰ﺎﺻ‰ﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﯾ‰ﮏ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﺩﺍﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺎﯾﻊ ﺷﯿﻤﯿﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻏﻮﻃﻪﻭﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﻥ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻓﻠﺰﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺟﺎﯼ ﻣﯽﻣﺎﻧﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻗﺴﻤﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺎﯾﻊ ﺷﯿﻤﯿﺎﯾﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻄﻼﺣﺎً ﺧﻮﺭﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﺳﻄﺤﯽ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺁﻣﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻄﺢ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﺟﻮﻫﺮ‬ ‫ﺁﻏﺸﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﺎﭖ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﻮﺩﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﯾﻨﺪ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺳﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺷﺖ ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻠﺰ ﻣﺬﺍﺏ ﻭ ﺩﺍﻍ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺰﺍﯾﺎﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭ ﻭﺵ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﻨﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺑﻮﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻫﻢ ﭼﺎﭖ ﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭﺭﻩﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ‪ ۱۹۷۰‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺩﻫ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۹۷۰‬ﻣ‰ﯿ‰ﻼﺩﯼ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﺍﺳ‰ﺎﺱ ﺳ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﯾ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﺍﯼ ﻇ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﺮ ﮔ‰ﺸ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑ‰ﺘ‰ﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﻬ‰ﺮﻩﮔ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﻮﻩ ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭ ﮔ‰ﺮﺍﻥ ﺑ‰ﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭﯼ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﯿ‰ﻠ‰ﯿ‰ﻮﻥﻫ‰ﺎ ﺩﻻﺭ ﻫ‰ﺰ ﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﻪ ﺩﺍﺷ‰ﺖ ﻭ ﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺑ‰ﻪ‬ ‫ﺳ‰ﺨ‰ﺘ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﺍﺧ‰ﺮ ﺩﻫ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۹۸۰‬ﻣ‰ﯿ‰ﻼﺩﯼ ﻣ‰ﺠ‰ﻠ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ Time‬ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﮑ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺲ‪ ،‬ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ QuarkXpress‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺭ ﻭﻣﯿﺰﯼ ‪ Macintash‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﭼﺎﻗﻮ ﻭ ﻓﯿﻠﻢ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ ﺭ ﻭﺵﻫﺎﯼ ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺭ ﻭﺯﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍ ﻣﯽﮐﺸﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲.۱‬‬ ‫‪ TEX‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺳﯽ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺶ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻼﯾﻢ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺑﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺳﺨﺖ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺑﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﻼﯾﻢ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺻﺮﻑ ﻭﻗﺖ ﻭ ﺯﻣﺎﻥ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﺨﺎﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺳﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮔﺸﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺏ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﻓﺖ ﻭ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﺘﺎ ِ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﺷﮑﺎﻻﺕ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻟﺰ ﻭﻡ ﻧﮑﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﻧﻮﺷﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺟﻬﺖ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺎﺷﺮ ﻣﯽﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﯿﭻ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺭﺗﺒﺎﻃﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣﺴﻮﻭﻝ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‬ ‫ٔ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ‪ ،‬ﮔﺎﻫﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺮﯾﻤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﻨﺎﻥ ﭼﺎﭘﺨﺎﻧﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﻣﺪ؛ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺪﺕ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺷﺨﺺ ﺟﺮﯾﻤﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﻪﺳﺨﺘﯽ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﮑﺎﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺴﺖ ﺑﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻩ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽﺩﺍﻧﺎﻥ ﺍﻓﺮﺍﺩﯼ ﺩﻗﯿﻖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺍﺻﻼﺣﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﺑﯿﻦ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﻓﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﮔﺸﺖ ﺑﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ‪ TEX‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ۱۹۸۲‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﻧﺎﻟﺪ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ‪ ،۱‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﮕﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻨﻔﻮﺭﺩ ‪ ،۲‬ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ‬ ‫ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺍﺳﺘﺎﻥ ‪ TEX‬ﺭﯾﺸﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ۱۹۶۹‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺟﻠﺪ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪The Art of Computer Programming‬‬ ‫ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ﺩﻭﻧ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﺪ ﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﺙ‪ ،‬ﮐ‰ﻪ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﺷ‰ﺎﻩﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺣ‰ﺴ‰ﺎﺏ ﻣ‰ﯽﺁﯾ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻭﺳ‰ﯿ‰ﻠ‰ﻪﯼ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻓ‰ﻠ‰ﺰﯼ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺷﯿﻮﻩﯼ ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺎﺷﯿﻦ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺮﻥ ‪ ۱۹‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﭖ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﺪ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ۱۹۷۶‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﻨﺎﻭﺭﯼ ﻋﮑﺎﺳﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ‪ ۳‬ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺷﺪ ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﻭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻭ ﭼﺎﭖ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﻗﺪﯾﻤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺱ ﻧﺒﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﺩﺳﺖ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺭﺳﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻭﯼ ﻧﺎﭘﺴﻨﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﯿﻦ ﺭ ﻭﺯﻫﺎ ﺑﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻗﻪﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﺪ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﺍﯼ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻮﻥ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﭘﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺎﻩ ﻣﻪ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ۱۹۷۷‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ TEX‬ﻭ ‪ METAFONT‬ﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﺑﻪ ]‪ [۱۷] ،[۱۶] ،[۱۵‬ﻭ ]‪.[۱۸‬‬ ‫‪1 Donald Knuth‬‬ ‫‪2 Stanford University‬‬ ‫‪3 Fonts‬‬ ‫‪۵‬‬ ‫‪ TEX ۲.۱‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟‬ ‫ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ‪ TEX‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﺩﻭﻡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ‪The Art of Computer‬‬ ‫‪ Programming‬ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺖ ﺍﻣ‰ﺎ ﻭﯼ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﮐ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫ‰ﺪﻑ ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦﻫ‰ﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺏ ‪،[۱۵] ،TEX‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭﺕﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺭ ﯾ‰ﺎﺿ‰ﯽ ﺍﻋ‰ﻼﻡ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﺙ ﺩﺭ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺶﮔ‰ﻔ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺭ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎ ِ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﻧﻮﯾﺴﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ TEX‬ﯾ‰ﮏ ﺳ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﯼ ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﺭﺍﯾ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺏﻫ‰ﺎ ﻭ ﺑ‰ﻪﻭ ﯾ‰ﮋﻩ‬ ‫ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺏﻫ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭﺑ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭﺕﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺭﯾ‰ﺎﺿ‰ﯽ ﺯﯾ‰ﺎﺩﯼ ﻫ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﺯﯾ‰ﺒ‰ﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫‪ ،TEX‬ﺁﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﺮ ﻭﺯﻩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ۱۹۸۲‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮ ﺷﺪ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺳﺎﻝ ‪ ۱۹۸۹‬ﻣﯿﻼﺩﯼ ﺑﻬﺒﻮﺩ ﯾﺎﻓﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ‪ ۸‬ﺑﯿﺘﯽ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻦﻫﺎﯼ ﭼﻨﺪﺯﺑﺎﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﭘﺸﺘﯿﺒﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﯿﻠﯽ ﺯ ﻭﺩ ‪ TEX‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﺎﻣﻊ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ﻭ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻫﺰﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﻧﻔﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺍﻧﺸﻤﻨﺪﺍﻥ ﻭ ﭘﮋﻭﻫﺸﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ﺭ ﻭﺍﺝ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﭽﻮﻥ ﺷﻌﺮ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻫﺮ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣﺎﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﯿﻔﯿﺖ ﻋﺎﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻝ ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ‪ TEX‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦﻫﺎﯼ ﻋﻠﻤﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐ‰ﺎﺭﺁﻣ‰ﺪﯼ ‪ ،TEX‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻭ ﯾ‰ﮋﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫ‰ﻨ‰ﮕ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﯽ ﺧ‰ﻮﺩﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﻣ‰ﯽﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﻮﺭﺩ ﻧ‰ﻈ‰ﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﻮﻝﻫ‰ﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﻭ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻫﺮ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻭ ﺑﻪﺯﯾﺒﺎﯾﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ TEX .‬ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﺣﻤﻞﭘﺬﯾﺮﯼ ‪ ۴‬ﺑﺎﻻﯾﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ TEX‬ﺑﺮ ﮔﺴﺘﺮﻩﯼ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﻭﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﻧ‰ﺘ‰ﯿ‰ﺠ‰ﻪﯼ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﻪﯼ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺳ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎ‪ ،‬ﯾ‰ﮑ‰ﺴ‰ﺎﻥ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻭﺍﻗ‰ﻌ‰ﯿ‰ﺘ‰ﯽ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺭﺗ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﻃ‰ﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻠﻤﯽ ﻭ ﻓﻨﯽ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ‪ TEX‬ﯾﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﻫﻢ ﻫﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﻭ ﭘﯿﺸﺮﻓﺖ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻤﮏ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﺑﯿﺴﺖ ﺳﺎﻝ ﭘﯿﺶ‪ ،‬ﮔﻮﺭﺩﻥ ﺑﻞ ‪ ۵‬ﺩﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﮔﻔﺘﺎﺭ ﮐﺘﺎﺏِ ]‪ [۲۰‬ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪4 Portability‬‬ ‫‪5 Gordon Bell‬‬ ‫‪۶‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ TEX‬ﺑﺎﻟﻘﻮﻩ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﻥ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺿﺮ ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ‪ TEX .‬ﻣﻌﺮﻑ ﯾﮏ ﺯﺑﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺍﺧﺘﺮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﺗﻨﺒﺮﮒ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪. . .‬‬ ‫ﺣﺪﻭﺩ ﯾﮏ ﺩﻫﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻮﻟﺪ ﺷﺪﻥ ‪ ،TEX‬ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺭﺳﻤﯽ ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ‪ TEX‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻄﺢ‬ ‫ﭘ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺪﺍﺭ ﺭﺳ‰ﯿ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﻭ ﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺗ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﯿ‰ﺮ ﻧ‰ﺨ‰ﻮﺍﻫ‰ﺪ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩ ]‪ .[۲۱‬ﻫ‰ﺮﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﻫ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﺯ ﻫ‰ﻢ ﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﺙ ﺍﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ TEX‬ﺭﺍ ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻝ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ TEX‬ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒ ًﺎ ﺻﻔﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳.۱‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺳ‰ﺎﻝﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺁﻏ‰ﺎﺯﯾ‰ﻦ ﺩﻫ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۹۸۰‬ﻣ‰ﯿ‰ﻼﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﻟ‰ﺰﻟ‰ﯽ ﻟ‰ﻤ‰ﭙ‰ﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ۶‬ﺷ‰ﺮ ﻭﻉ ﺑ‰ﻪﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﮐ‰ﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﯾﮏ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺁﻣﺎﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺮ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ‪ TEX‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ‪ TEX‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺗﻮﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ‪ LaTEX‬ﮔﺮﺩﺍﯾﻪﺍﯼ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻮﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺳﻌﻪ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪﯼ‬ ‫‪ TEX‬ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺑ‰ﻪﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪﺍﯼ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺍﻣ‰ﮑ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﺎﺗ‰ﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧ‰ﺘ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭ ﻣ‰ﯽﺩﻫ‰ﺪ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻭﯼ ﺑ‰ﺘ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﺁﺳ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽﻫﺎﯼ ‪ TEX‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩﻣﻨﺪ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺮﺍﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﻄﺢ ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦ ‪ TEX‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺳﻄﺢ ﺑﺎﻻﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ‬ ‫ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻋ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﺍﻥ ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺧ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺍﻣ‰ﮑ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﺎﺕ ﮐ‰ﻪ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﺑ‰ﺎ ﮐ‰ﻤ‰ﮏ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ‪ TEX‬ﻓﺎﻗﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﺩ ﻓ‰ﻬ‰ﺮﺳ‰ﺖِ ﻣ‰ﻄ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﺐ‪ ،‬ﺳ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﯼ ﺍﺭﺟ‰ﺎﻉ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻘ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﻞ‪ ۷ ،‬ﺍﯾ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﺩ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻪ‪۸ ،‬‬ ‫ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‪. . . ،‬‬ ‫ﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺭ ﻭﯼ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﺟﺎﯼ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟ ِ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪6 Lesli Lampart‬‬ ‫‪7 Cross reference‬‬ ‫‪8 Index‬‬ ‫‪۷‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX ۳.۱‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟‬ ‫‪۱.۳.۱‬‬ ‫ﻣﻮﻟﻒ‪ ،‬ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻦ‬ ‫ٔ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﻌ‰ﻤ‰ﻮﻻً‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺮﺍﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﺍﻧ‰ﺘ‰ﺸ‰ﺎﺭ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺏ ﺍﺑ‰ﺘ‰ﺪﺍ ﻧ‰ﻮﯾ‰ﺴ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﻩ ﺩﺳ‰ﺖﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺧ‰ﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺗ‰ﺤ‰ﻮﯾ‰ﻞ ﻣ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﺴ‰ﻪ‬ ‫ٔ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺘﺸﺮﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ‪ ۹‬ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺳﺴﻪ ﺗﺼﻤﯿﻢ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ٔ‬ ‫ﻧ‰ﻈ‰ﺮ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﻭ ﺻ‰ﻔ‰ﺤ‰ﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾ‰ﯽ ﺷ‰ﻮﺩ؛ ﭼ‰ﮕ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪ ﻋ‰ﺮﺽ ﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻮﻥﻫ‰ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧ‰ﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻓ‰ﻀ‰ﺎﯼ ﺧ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﻭ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺮﺑﺮﮒﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿﺎﺗﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﻭ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﻣﺴﻮﻭﻝ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ٔ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﻃﺮﺍﺡ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﺍ ﺍﯾﻔﺎ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ‪ TEX‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺴﻮﻭﻝ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ٔ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﯽﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣ‰ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫ‰ﺮﺻ‰ﻮﺭﺕ‪ LaTEX ،‬ﯾ‰ﮏ ﺑ‰ﺮﻧ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﻪﯼ ﺭﺍﯾ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﻭ ﻧ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺯ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺭﺍﻫ‰ﻨ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﻭ ﺍﻃ‰ﻼﻋ‰ﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺷﻨﺎ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﯾﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲.۳.۱‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﺠﺮﺑﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎﺯ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫}‪\documentclass{article‬‬ ‫}‪\begin{document‬‬ ‫‪This is my \emph{first} document prepared‬‬ ‫‪in \LaTeX.‬‬ ‫}‪\end{document‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ‪ backslash‬ﮔﻮﯾﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ‪ ،/‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ‪ forward slash‬ﮔﻮﯾﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ myfile.tex‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻣﯽﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫‪ tex‬ﺑ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺟ‰ﺮﺍ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﺑ‰ﺮﻧ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﻪ ﻭ ﺩﯾ‰ﺪﻥ ﺣ‰ﺎﺻ‰ﻞ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﮕ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺳ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﯼ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧ‰ﺪﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﯼ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ‬ ‫‪۹‬ﻧﺎﺷﺮ‬ ‫‪۸‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ‪ Command Prompt‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ‬ ‫‪ myfile.tex‬ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪working-folder > latex myfile‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪working-folder > yap myfile‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭘﻨﺠﺮﻩﺍﯼ ﺑﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪۱۰ .‬‬ ‫‪This is my first document prepared in LATEX.‬‬ ‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻧﻘﺶ ﯾﮏ ﻭﺍﺳﻂ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻔﺎ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﻨﺪ ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺑﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﻌﺮ ﻭﻑ ‪ WinEdt‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺩﯾﺪﻥ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮ ﺩﮐﻤﻪﯼ ‪ DVI‬ﺍﺷﺎﺭﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳.۳.۱‬‬ ‫ﯼ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩ ِ‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫ﯽ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ L TEX‬ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨ ِ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺤﻮﻩﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﻣﺸﺨﺺ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻝ ﻗ‰ﺒ‰ﻞ ﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﯽ ﺩﻗ‰ﯿ‰ﻖﺗ‰ﺮ ﻣ‰ﯽﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﻭﻟ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ ﺧ‰ﻂ‪ ،‬ﯾ‰ﻌ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﺍ ﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﻥ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺭ ﻣ‰ﺜ‰ﺎ ِ‬ ‫}‪ ،\documentclass{atricle‬ﺑ‰‰ﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﻋ‰‰ﻼﻥ ﻣ‰‰ﯽﮐ‰‰ﻨ‰‰ﺪ ﻧ‰‰ﻮﺷ‰‰ﺘ‰‰ﻪﯼ ﻣ‰‰ﻮﺭﺩ ﻧ‰‰ﻈ‰‰ﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻧ‰‰ﻮﻉ ﻣ‰‰ﻘ‰‰ﺎﻟ‰‰ﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔ‰ﺮ ﺑ‰ﺨ‰ﻮﺍﻫ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻗ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﺐ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺏ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐ‰ﺎﻓ‰ﯽ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺍﻭﻟ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ ﺧ‰ﻂ ﺑ‰ﻪ‬ ‫}‪ \documentclass{book‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ }‪ \begin{document‬ﻭ }‪\end{document‬‬ ‫ﻝ ﺳﺎﺩﻩﯼ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎ ِ‬ ‫ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﺣ‰ﺎﺻ‰ﻞ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺧ‰ﺮ ﻭﺟ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣ‰ﻘ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺴ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﯽﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ‪ .‬ﺳ‰ﻪ ﮐ‰ﻠ‰ﻤ‰ﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻥﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ‬ ‫‪۱۰‬ﻗﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰ ﻭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪۹‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX ۳.۱‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟‬ ‫ﻞ }‪ \emph{first‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﭙﺲ ﺣﺎﺻ ِ‬ ‫ﺻ‰ﻮﺭﺕ ‪ first‬ﺁﻣ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ \emph .‬ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ ۱۱‬ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﻭ ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﮐ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ }‪\emph{htext i‬‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﺎﻋ‰ﺚ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ‪ ،htext i‬ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﺪﻭﺩ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﻭ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺭﮔ‰ﻮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪\emph‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗٔﺎﮐﯿﺪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺳﻪ ﮐﻠﻤﻪﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﻄﻠﻮﺏ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ‪ \LaTeX‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﭼﺎﭖِ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﮑﺘﻪ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﮐ‰ﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﻬ‰ﻢ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎ ﻧ‰ﺴ‰ﺒ‰ﺖ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐ‰ﻮﭼ‰ﮏ ﻭ ﺑ‰ﺰ ﺭﮒ ﺣ‰ﺴ‰ﺎﺱ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ‪ \LaTeX‬ﺑﻪ ‪ \latex‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭘﯿﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ‬ ‫‪undefined control sequence‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶِ ‪ ،۱.۶.۱‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﺤﺚ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺕ ‪ Today is \today‬ﺭﺍ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺍﻧ‰ﺘ‰ﻬ‰ﺎﯼ ﺧ‰ﻂ ﺍﺿ‰ﺎﻓ‰ﻪ ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﻮﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘ‰ﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻣ‰ﺠ‰ﺪِﺩ‬ ‫ﺍ ﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﻥ ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭ ِ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۴.۳.۱‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺧﯿﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﻫ‰ﻨ‰ﮕ‰ﺎﻡ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻓ‰ﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧ‰ﯽ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ؛ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﺎ ﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣ‰ﯽﺧ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺎﺩﯼ ﻣﯽﻧﻮﯾﺴﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺑﻌﻀﯽ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﻗﻊ ﻟﺰ ﻭﻡ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۱.۱‬ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﺍﯾﻨﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ؛ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﭼﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭼﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۱.۱‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻓﻘﻂ‬ ‫ﻧﻘﺶ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ cls ،tex‬ﻭ ‪ ،sty‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻧﻘﺶ‬ ‫ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ dvi‬ﻭ ‪ .log‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﻣﯽﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻫﻢ‬ ‫‪11 Command‬‬ ‫‪۱۰‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫)‪user input (tex‬‬ ‫)‪document class (cls‬‬ ‫)‪bibliography (bbl‬‬ ‫)‪packages (sty‬‬ ‫‪LATEX‬‬ ‫)‪fonts (fmt, tfm, fd‬‬ ‫‪working files‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫‪aux idx‬‬ ‫‪ toc lof ‬‬ ‫‪log ind‬‬ ‫‪‬‬ ‫)‪transcript files (log, lis‬‬ ‫)‪TEX output (dvi‬‬ ‫)‪Acrobat (pdf‬‬ ‫‪Postscript (ps),‬‬ ‫‪Screen,‬‬ ‫‪Printer,‬‬ ‫ﻞ ‪ :۱.۱‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺧﯿﻞ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‬ ‫ﺷﮑ ِ‬ ‫ﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻧ‰ﻘ‰ﺶ ﺩﺍﺭﻧ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾ‰ﻌ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟ‰ﺮﺍﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺑ‰ﻌ‰ﺪﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻃ‰ﻼﻋ‰ﺎﺕ ﻣ‰ﻮﺟ‰ﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻧ‰ﻬ‰ﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﻪﻋ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﺍﻥ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩ ِ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ aux‬ﻭ ‪.toc‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ ،myfile.tex‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﯼ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ‪۱۲‬‬ ‫ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫‪ myfile.toc‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﻫﻨﻮﺯ ﮐﺎﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻻﺯﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ myfile.tex‬ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﻨ‰ﺘ‰ﻘ‰ﻞ ﮔ‰ﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺣ‰ﺘ‰ﯽ ﮔ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺗ‰ﺎ ﺳ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﺮﺗ‰ﺒ‰ﻪ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺍﺟ‰ﺮﺍ ﺷ‰ﻮﺩ ﺗ‰ﺎ ﻧ‰ﺘ‰ﯿ‰ﺠ‰ﻪ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻭ ﮐﻤﺎﻝ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﯼ ‪ ۶.۴ ،۵.۴‬ﻭ ‪ ۷.۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻼﺻﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ tex‬ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪12 Working folder‬‬ ‫‪۱۱‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX ۳.۱‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪tex‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﻋﻼﻥ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺸﮕﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ cls‬ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﺎﺧﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺴﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻌﯿﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \documentclass‬ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ }‪.\documentclass{report‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﭘ‰ﻨ‰ﺞ ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﻭﺟ‰ﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ (۱ :‬ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﻣ‰ﻘ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ‬ ‫‪ (۲ ،article.cls‬ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﮔ‰ﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ‪ (۳ ،report.cls‬ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺏ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ‪ (۴ ،book.cls‬ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﻧ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ‪ letter.cls‬ﻭ ‪ (۵‬ﺭﺩﻩﯼ‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﻼﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ .slides.cls‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۱.۴‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۲۵۳‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪amsart, amsbook, memoir, prosper, beamer‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ sty‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺍﺷﺨﺎﺹ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻭ ﺳﺎﺯﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﭘ‰ﺴ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﺪ ‪ sty‬ﺫﺧ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞﻫ‰ﺎ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎ ﻭ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂﻫ‰ﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﯾﺪﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮﯼ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽﻫﺎﯼ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧ‰ﺘ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭ ﮔ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞﻫ‰ﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷ‰ﺎﺧ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎ ﻭ ﻣ‰ﺴ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﺨ‰ﺼ‰ﯽ ﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﻬ‰ﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪\usepackage‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ }‪.\usepackage{amsmath‬‬ ‫‪۱۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﻪﻋ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﺍﻥ ﻣ‰ﺜ‰ﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ amsmath‬ﺗ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺭ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭﺕﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺭ ﯾ‰ﺎﺿ‰ﯽ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺍﻓﺰﺍﯾﺶ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪ makeidx‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪ graphicx‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻥ‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺕ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ tfm, fmt, fd‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺩﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞﻫ‰ﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻃ‰ﻼﻋ‰ﺎﺗ‰ﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑ‰ﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻧ‰ﻮﻉ ﻗ‰ﻠ‰ﻢ ﻭ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞِ ﻗ‰ﻠ‰ﻢ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ myfile.tex‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ dvi‬ﻣﻬﻤﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ myfile.tex‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ‬ ‫‪ myfile.dvi‬ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﯼ ‪ ،DVI‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ Yap‬ﺩﺭ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ xdvi‬ﺩﺭ ‪ ،Linux‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪working-folder > dvips myfile.dvi‬‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ myfile.ps‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ‪ PostScript‬ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ Microsoft Windows‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ ‪ GSView‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ log‬ﺩﺭ ﻫ‰ﺮ ﺑ‰ﺎﺭ ﺍﺟ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ myfile.tex‬ﮔ‰ﺰﺍﺭﺷ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ ﺭﺥ ﻣ‰ﯽﺩﻫ‰ﺪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻠﻮﯼ ﺩﯾﺪﮔﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻋﺒﻮﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﺵ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ myfile.log‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎﯼ ﻫﺸﺪﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﻄﺎ ﻭ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻣﻔﯿﺪ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞﻫ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺗ‰ﻮﺿ‰ﯿ‰ﺢ ﺁﻥ ﻣ‰ﯽﭘ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺯ ﯾ‰ﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺁﻧ‰ﮑ‰ﻪ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﭼ‰ﻪ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ myfile.tex‬ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻭﯼ ﺍﺯ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭼﻪ ﻣﯽﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ ،myfile.tex‬ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺗﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﺨﺺ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩﺍﯼ ﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX ۳.۱‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟‬ ‫‪۱۳‬‬ ‫‪ toc‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ،\tableofcontents‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ LaTEX ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ toc‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺯﯾﺮﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﺎﻇﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ LaTEX .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﺗﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﮕﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ‪ ،‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﻣﻨﺠﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮﺍﺕ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﻨﻌﮑﺲ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﻬﺮﺳ ِ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ lof‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ toc‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ \listoffigures‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ lot‬ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ toc‬ﻭ ‪ lof‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \listoftables‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ idx‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ ،\makeindex‬ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺍﺟﺮﺍﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﺨ‰ﺺ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﭘ‰ﺴ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﺪ ‪ idx‬ﺫﺧ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧ‰ﮑ‰ﻪ‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺍﻃ‰ﻼﻋ‰ﺎﺕ ﺩﺭ ﮔ‰ﻨ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﺪﻥ ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﻬ‰ﺮﻩ ﮔ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺍﺑ‰ﺘ‰ﺪﺍ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﺮﻧ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ ،[۱۲] ،MakeIndex‬ﭘ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﮔ‰ﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺑ‰ﺮﻧ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﻪ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ‪ idx‬ﺭﺍ ﺧ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﺪﻩ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﻫ‰ﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ ind‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ ind‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ind‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ‪ ،idx‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ ‪ MakeIndex‬ﻓﺎﯾﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭘﺴﻮﻧﺪ ‪ind‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ LaTEX .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ aux‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۹.۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۶۹‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﯾﺪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﻞ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺭ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤ ِ‬ ‫ﺕ ﻣ‰ﺮﺑ‰ﻮﻁ ﺑ‰ﻪ‬ ‫ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻩﮔ‰ﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻣ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﺁﺳ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﻡ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻧ‰ﺘ‰ﻘ‰ﺎﻝ ﺍﻃ‰ﻼﻋ‰ﺎ ِ‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟ‰ﺎﻉﺩﻫ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻗ‰ﺒ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﭘ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﺑ‰ﻌ‰ﺪﯼ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻋ‰ﻬ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﮐ‰ﻤ‰ﮑ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﭘ‰ﺴ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﺪ ‪aux‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪۱۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪۵.۳.۱‬‬ ‫ﭼﺮﺍ ‪LaTEX‬؟‬ ‫ﺷ‰‰ﯿ‰‰ﻮﻩﯼ ﮐ‰‰ﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑ‰‰ﺎ ﭘ‰‰ﺮﺩﺍﺯﺷ‰‰ﮕ‰‰ﺮﻫ‰‰ﺎﯼ ﻣ‰‰ﺘ‰‰ﻨ‰‰ﯽ ﭘ‰‰ﯿ‰‰ﺸ‰‰ﺮﻓ‰‰ﺘ‰‰ﻪ ﻣ‰‰ﺎﻧ‰‰ﻨ‰‰ﺪ ‪ Microsoft Word‬ﻭ ‪Corel‬‬ ‫‪ WordPerfect‬ﮐﺎﻣﻼً ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵﮔﺮﻫﺎ ﻟﻔﻆ ‪ WYSIWYG‬ﺍﻃﻼﻕ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻤﻠﻪﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪What You See Is What You Get.‬‬ ‫ﻫ‰ﻨ‰ﮕ‰ﺎﻡ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﺮﻧ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎ‪ ،‬ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﺿ‰ﻤ‰ﻦ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ﺷ‰ﺨ‰ﺼ‰ﺎً ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺻ‰ﻔ‰ﺤ‰ﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾ‰ﯽ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻤﺎﺕ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗ ٔﺎﺛﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻘﺎﺑﻞ ‪۱۳‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺮ ﻭﺯ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﺷﺨﺺ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺿﻤﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﮕِﺮ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺳﭙﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻞ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻓﻘﻂ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﯾﺪ ِ‬ ‫ﻥ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪ ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﻭ ﻋﻤ ِ‬ ‫ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﺧ‰ﺮ ﻭﺟ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﻫ‰ﻢﺯﻣ‰ﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣ‰ﮑ‰ﺎﻥﭘ‰ﺬﯾ‰ﺮ ﻧ‰ﯿ‰ﺴ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﭘ‰ﺲ ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺯﺵ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ ِ‬ ‫ﻂ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺶ‬ ‫ﻧﻬﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺳ ِ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﺳﺘﺎﺩﻥ ﺑﻪ ﭼﺎﭘﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺻﻼﺡ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﭼ‰ﺮﺍ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭﺩﺳ‰ﺮ؟ ﭼ‰ﺮﺍ ﺑ‰ﻪﺁﺳ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﭘ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺯﺷ‰ﮕ‰ﺮ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﺳ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﯾ‰ﺎ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺸ‰ﺮﻓ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮔﻮﻧﻪﯼ ‪ WYSIWYG‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﮑﻨﯿﻢ؟‬ ‫ﭘ‰ﺎﺳ‰ﺦ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﭘ‰ﺮﺳ‰ﺶ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗ‰ﻊ ﯾ‰ﮑ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﺎﺳ‰ﺦﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﯿ‰ﺰﻩﯼ ﺍﯾ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﺩ ‪ TEX‬ﻧ‰ﻬ‰ﻔ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻥ ‪ TEX‬ﺩﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﺑ‰ﺮﻧ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﻪﯼ ﺭﺍﯾ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﮐ‰ﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﻭﻧ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﺪ ﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﺙ ﻣ‰ﯽﮔ‰ﻮ ﯾ‰ﺪ ﻫ‰ﺪﻑ ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ ِ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺘﻦﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺭﺍ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻫﺮﺍﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻭ ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﺷﮕﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺭﺍﯾﺞ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺯﯾﺒﺎ ﻭ ﺭﺿﺎﯾﺖﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ LaTEX ،‬ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺑﻬﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ LaTEX ،‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﻣﯽﺷﻤﺎﺭﯾﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪13 Interactively‬‬ ‫‪۱۵‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX ۳.۱‬ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟‬ ‫‪ LaTEX ‐۱‬ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮐﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺮﻡﺍﻓﺰﺍﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﺠﺎﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﻧﺪﺍﺭﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﺣﻘﻮﻕ ﻣﻮﻟﻒ ﻭ ﻧﺎﺷﺮ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﺟﺴﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ٔ‬ ‫‪ ‐۲‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺁﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺑﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺳﭙﺮﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦﺭ ﻭ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺴﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﺪﺍﻗﻞ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﯾﮋﮔﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﺍﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭ ﻣﻨﻄﻘﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻤﺮﮐﺰ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﻭﻗﺖ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺻﺮﻑ ﭘﺮﺩﺍﺧﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۳‬ﺭﺩﻩﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺶ ﻃ‰ﺮﺍﺣ‰ﯽ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﺳ‰ﺎﺧ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺭ ﻣ‰ﻨ‰ﻄ‰ﻘ‰ﯽ ﻭ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞ ﻇ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﺮﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓﻪﺍﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۴‬ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﻮﻝﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﺭ ﯾ‰ﺎﺿ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪﺁﺳ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﯽ ﻗ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﻞ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﮐ‰ﺎﻓ‰ﯽ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺍﺑ‰ﺘ‰ﺪﺍ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧ‰ﺪﮐ‰ﯽ ﻗ‰ﻮﺍﻋ‰ﺪ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﻮﻝﻧ‰ﻮ ﯾ‰ﺴ‰ﯽ ﺭﺍ ﻓ‰ﺮﺍ ﮔ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﺩ ﺗ‰ﺎ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻫ‰ﺮ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﻮﻝ ﺭ ﯾ‰ﺎﺿ‰ﯽ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﺳﺎﺩﮔﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۵‬ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﯿﭽﯿﺪﻩﺍﯼ ﭼﻮﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﻭ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۶‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﺭ ﻭﺯ ‪۱۴‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX ‐۷‬ﺍﺯ ﻗ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﻠ‰ﯿ‰ﺖ ﺣ‰ﻤ‰ﻞﭘ‰ﺬﯾ‰ﺮﯼ ﻓ‰ﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﺮﺧ‰ﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭﯼ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺗ‰ﻘ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﺒ‰ﺎً ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﻪﯼ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﻩﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺭﺍﯾﺞ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪﯼ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻞ ﭘﺮﺳ ﺶِ ﻣﻄﺮﺡ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻭ ﺁ ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽﻫﺎﯼ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﺳ ﺦِ ﮐﺎﻣ ِ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺭﺳﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪14 Up to date‬‬ ‫‪۱۶‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪۴.۱‬‬ ‫ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪\LaTeX{} has several pre-defined styles for the layout of‬‬ ‫‪typeset documents. Authors using \LaTeX{} sometimes‬‬ ‫‪wish to understand how these layouts are parameterized.‬‬ ‫‪The layouts package enables the display of certain of these parameterized‬‬ ‫‪layouts, showing what the parameters control.‬‬ ‫‪LATEX has several pre-defined styles for the layout of typeset documents. Authors‬‬ ‫‪using LATEX sometimes wish to understand how these layouts are parameterized. The‬‬ ‫‪layouts package enables the display of certain of these parameterized layouts, showing‬‬ ‫‪what the parameters control.‬‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﻼﺣ‰ﻈ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫ‰ﺮﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﻣ‰ﻤ‰ﮑ‰ﻦ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞِ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺧ‰ﻄ‰ﻮﻁ ﺩﺭ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﭘ‰ﺎﺭﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮﺍﻑ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻃ‰ﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻞ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﻫﻤﮕﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻃﻮﻝ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾ ِ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ TAB‬ﻭ ‪ BLANK‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﺘﻌﺪﺩ ﭘﺸﺖ ﺳﺮ ﻫﻢ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯼ ﻫﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺭﻓﺘﻦ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮐﻠﯿﺪ ‪ ENTER‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺗﻌﺒﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﯾ‰ﺎ ﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﺸ‰ﺘ‰ﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﺘ‰ﻮ ﯾ‰ﺎﺕ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﺨ‰ﺺﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﭘ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺎﻥ ﭘ‰ﺎﺭﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮﺍﻑ ﺟ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺷ‰ﺮ ﻭﻉ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﻢﺍﺭ ﺯ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪It does not matter wether you enter one‬‬ ‫‪or several spaces after a word.‬‬ ‫‪An empty line, or more, starts a new‬‬ ‫‪paragraph.‬‬ ‫‪It does not matter wether you‬‬ ‫‪enter one or several‬‬ ‫‪spaces‬‬ ‫‪after a word.‬‬ ‫‪An empty line, or more, starts‬‬ ‫‪a new paragraph.‬‬ ‫ﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪﯼ ﻣﺘﻮﺍﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻌﺎﺭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺕ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﻀﺎ ِ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﻪﯼ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ‐ﮐﻠﻤﻪﺍﯼ ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ‬ ‫‪۱۷‬‬ ‫‪ ۴.۱‬ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻣﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ LaTEX .‬ﻧﯿﺰ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﭘﯿﺮ ﻭﯼ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ؟‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫!‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ‪۱۵‬‬ ‫?‬ ‫‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﻪﺧﺎﻃﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻭ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺣﺮﻑ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﯽ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻧﻤﯽﺁﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Carrots are good for your eyes, since they contain Vitamin A. Have‬‬ ‫?‪you ever seen a rabbit wearing glasses‬‬ ‫‪Carrots are good for your eyes, since they contain Vitamin A. Have you ever seen a‬‬ ‫?‪rabbit wearing glasses‬‬ ‫ﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮﻑ ”‪ “A‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﺎ ِ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺭﻋﺎﯾﺖ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺭﻓﻊ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ @\‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ @\‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﯾﻢ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥِ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﻘﺎﯾﺴﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺁﯾﺎ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻗﺒﻞ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﺸﺨﯿﺺ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Carrots are good for your eyes, since they contain Vitamin A\@. Have‬‬ ‫?‪you ever seen a rabbit wearing glasses‬‬ ‫‪Carrots are good for your eyes, since they contain Vitamin A. Have you ever seen a‬‬ ‫?‪rabbit wearing glasses‬‬ ‫ﻑ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‪ ،‬ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﻫﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﯾﮏ ﺣﺮﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﺮ ِ‬ ‫ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪۱۵‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﺩﺭ ﺍﻟﻔﺒﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﮕﻠﯿﺴﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ‪a,b,. . . ,z‬‬ ‫‪۱۸‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪The numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. are called natural numbers. According‬‬ ‫‪to Kroncker, they were made by God; all else being the work of man.‬‬ ‫‪The numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. are called natural numbers. According to Kroncker, they‬‬ ‫‪were made by God; all else being the work of man.‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ”‪ “etc.‬ﺭﺍ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺟﻤﻠﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ‐ﮐﻠﻤﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﻠﻮﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺷﺘﺒﺎﻩ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺍﺯ ”‪ “etc.‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪The numbers 1, 2, 3 etc.\ are called natural numbers. According‬‬ ‫‪to Kroncker, they were made by God; all else being the work of man.‬‬ ‫‪The numbers 1, 2, 3 etc. are called natural numbers. According to Kroncker, they‬‬ ‫‪were made by God; all else being the work of man.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ‐ﮐﻠﻤﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﯾ‰ﮑ‰ﯽ ﺩﯾ‰ﮕ‰ﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺍﻩﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺍﯾ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﺩ ﻓ‰ﻀ‰ﺎﯼ ﺧ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ‐ﮐ‰ﻠ‰ﻤ‰ﻪﺍﯼ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﮐ‰ﺮﺍ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺮ ~ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺗ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﻭﺕ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ~ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ~ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻏﯿﺮ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺷﮑﺴﺖ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Zorn Lemma‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺍﮊﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ ‪ Zorn‬ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﻭ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ ‪ Lemma‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﭼﻨﺪﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﺴﻨﺪﯾﺪﻩ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﻪﺟﺎﯼ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Zorn Lemma‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪Zorn~Lemma‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺿﻤﻦ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ ‪ Zorn‬ﻭ ‪ ،Lemma‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻭ ﮐﻠﻤﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻫﻢ ﺟﺪﺍﺷﺪﻧﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ Zorn Lemma‬ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﯼ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺪﯾﺪﺁﻭﺭ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۲.۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪۸۳‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪I think LATEXis fun.‬‬ ‫‪I think \LaTeX is fun.‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪۱۹‬‬ ‫‪ ۵.۱‬ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﭼﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ \LaTeX‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﻣﺜﻞ ﺍﯾﻨﮑﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻠﻌﯿﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ! ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﻠﯽ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﻧﻤﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﺑﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ \ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I think LATEX is fun.‬‬ ‫‪I think \LaTeX\ is fun.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍﻩ ﺣﻞ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺸﮑﻞ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻼﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﯾﺎﺑﺪ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﯼ }{ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺮﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪I think LATEX is fun.‬‬ ‫‪I think \LaTeX{} is fun.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓﻀﺎﻫﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۲.۲‬ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۵.۱‬‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﻥ‬ ‫ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻇ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﺮ ﺷ‰ﺪ ِ‬ ‫ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻥﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣ‰ﺜ‰ﺎﻝﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺸ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﻼﺣ‰ﻈ‰ﻪ ﺷ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺣ‰ﺎﺻ‰ﻞ ‪ \LaTeX‬ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ ِ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺭ ﺧ‰ﺮ ﻭﺟ‰ﯽ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻋ‰ﻼﻭﻩ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ \ ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺮﺍﻩ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻓ‰ﻀ‰ﺎﯼ ﺧ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﯽ ﭘ‰ﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﻦ‐ﮐﻠﻤﻪﺍﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻀﺎ ِ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺯ ﻋ‰ﻼﻣ‰ﺖ \ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﻣ‰ﻨ‰ﻈ‰ﻮﺭ ﺧ‰ﺎﺻ‰ﯽ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ؛ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧ‰ﮑ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﻋ‰ﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ \ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿ‬ ‫ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﻢ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﭘﺲ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ”\“ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ \textbackslash‬ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺼ‰ﻞ ‪ ۳‬ﺧ‰ﻮﺍﻫ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ ﺩﯾ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭﺕﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺭ ﯾ‰ﺎﺿ‰ﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ”\“ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \backslash‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪The command \verb|\textbackslash| produces ‘‘\textbackslash’’. Maybe,‬‬ ‫‪I have now learnt about 1% of \LaTeX.‬‬ ‫‪The command \textbackslash produces “\”. Maybe, I have now learnt about 1‬‬ ‫‪۲۰‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺳﺮ ﺑﺎﻗﯿﻤﺎﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ‪ 1‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ %‬ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﺲ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ %‬ﺑﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﻋﻼﻥ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻤﻼﺗﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﺒﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﯽﺗ‰ﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻋ‰ﻼﻣ‰ﺖ ‪ %‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﺟ‰ﻤ‰ﻼﺕ‬ ‫ﺗ‰ﻮﺿ‰ﯿ‰ﺤ‰ﯽ ‪۱۶‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑ‰ﻬ‰ﺮﻩ ﮔ‰ﺮﻓ‰ﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻥ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻭ ﯾ‰ﮋﮔ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺛ‰ﺒ‰ﺖ ﻧ‰ﮑ‰ﺎﺗ‰ﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮﻧ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﻪﯼ ﺧ‰ﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩﯼ ﺧ‰ﻮﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﺮﻧ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﻪﻧ‰ﻮ ﯾ‰ﺴ‰ﺎ ِ‬ ‫ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺩ ﻣﯽﺑﺮﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﯾﮕﺮﺍﻥ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﻌﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾ ِ‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺪﺳﺖ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ”‪ “%‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﭼﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﮐﺮﺩ؟ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ \%‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪:‬‬ ‫‪Maybe, I have now learnt about 1\% of \LaTeX.‬‬ ‫‪Maybe, I have now learnt about 1% of LATEX.‬‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﯼ \ ﻭ ‪ %‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻩ ﻋﻼﻣ ﺖِ ﺧﺎﺹ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺮﺩﺍﯾﻪﯼ ﮐﺎﻣﻞ‬ ‫ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫}‬ ‫{‬ ‫\‬ ‫_‬ ‫&‬ ‫~‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫^‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦﻫﺎ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﮐ‰ﺎﺭﯼ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣ‰ﺘ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻻً‪ ،‬ﻧ‰ﺎﺧ‰ﻮﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﯾ‰ﺎ ﺍﯾ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﺩ ﺧ‰ﻄ‰ﺎ ﻣ‰ﯽﮔ‰ﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟ‰ﺪﻭﻝِ ‪ ۱.۱‬ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻻﺯﻡ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﭘ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ‬ ‫ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ‪ ،‬ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻏﯿﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻪ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ~ ﻭ ^ ﻭ \‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺑﺎ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ~\ ﻭ ^\ ﺑﻪ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺍﻟﻒ‪۱۸.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۳۹۱‬ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ \\ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪This is the first line.‬‬ ‫‪This is the second line.‬‬ ‫‪This is the first‬‬ ‫‪line.\\ This is the second line.‬‬ ‫‪16 Comments‬‬ ‫‪۲۱‬‬ ‫‪ ۵.۱‬ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫‪Input‬‬ ‫‪Output‬‬ ‫‪Character‬‬ ‫ˆ‬ ‫‪\textasciicircum‬‬ ‫^‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫‪\#‬‬ ‫‪#‬‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫‪\$‬‬ ‫‪$‬‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫‪\%‬‬ ‫‪%‬‬ ‫˜‬ ‫‪\textasciitilde‬‬ ‫~‬ ‫&‬ ‫&\‬ ‫&‬ ‫_\‬ ‫_‬ ‫\‬ ‫‪\textbackslash‬‬ ‫\‬ ‫{‬ ‫{\‬ ‫{‬ ‫}‬ ‫}\‬ ‫}‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝِ ‪ :۱.۱‬ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ‬ ‫ﻂ ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﮐ‰ﻤ‰ﮏ‬ ‫ﻂ ﺟ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺁﻏ‰ﺎﺯ ﺧ‰ ِ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻣ‰ﯽﺗ‰ﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﯼ \\ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﭘ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺧ‰ ِ‬ ‫ﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ]‪ \\[hheight i‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ hheight i‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺻﻮﺭ ِ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻨﻈﯿﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪hheight i .‬‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ cm‬ﯾﺎ ‪ pt‬ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۶.۶.۱‬ﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ۴.۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ،۴۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ‬ ‫‪ hheight i‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺣ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﺖ ﻋ‰ﺎﺩﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﻘ‰ﺪﺍﺭ ‪ hheight i‬ﻣ‰ﻨ‰ﻔ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ ﺧ‰ﻂ ﺑ‰ﻌ‰ﺪﯼ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺧ‰ﻂ ﺟ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﻧ‰ﺰﺩﯾ‰ﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ hheight i‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ hheight i‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪\baselineskip‬‬ ‫ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺣﻤﻞﭘﺬﯾﺮﯼ ‪۱۷‬‬ ‫ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪17 Portability‬‬ ‫‪۲۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪This is the first line.‬‬ ‫‪This is the second line.‬‬ ‫‪This is the third line.‬‬ ‫‪This is the last line.‬‬ ‫\\‪This is the first line.‬‬ ‫]‪This is the second line.\\[10pt‬‬ ‫‪This is the third‬‬ ‫]‪line.\\[-.3\baselineskip‬‬ ‫‪This is the last line.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ \\ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۱.۱.۲‬ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺭﺍﺋﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻃﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۶.۶.۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺁﻣﻮﺯﯾﻢ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪\emph{first} ،\tableofcontents‬‬ ‫ﻭ &\‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗ‰ﻊ ﮐ‰ﺮﺍﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺮ \ ﺑ‰ﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﻋ‰ﻼﻥ ﻣ‰ﯽﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﺁﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﻼﻓ‰ﺎﺻ‰ﻠ‰ﻪ ﭘ‰ﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣ‰ﯽﺁﯾ‰ﺪ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﻧ‰ﯿ‰ﺴ‰ﺖ ﺑ‰ﻠ‰ﮑ‰ﻪ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﻭ ﺩﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻮﺭﯼ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﻡ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﻣ‰ﺜ‰ﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ \tableofcontents‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﻞ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻻﺯﻡ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﻫﯿﭻ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ؛ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﻪﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﻪ ﻓ‰ﺼ‰ﻞﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺑ‰ﺨ‰ﺶﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻩ ﺑ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ ،\tableofcontents‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﺧ‰ﻮﺩﮐ‰ﺎﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﯼ ‪ ۴.۴‬ﻭ ‪ ۵.۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ ﻭ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ‬ ‫ﺣﺴﺎﺱ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \LaTeX‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪﻥ ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \latex‬ﻧﺎﺷﻨﺎﺧﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲۳‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﺸﮑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪۱۸ .‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻓ‰ﻀ‰ﺎﯼ ﺧ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻋ‰ﺪﺩ ﯾ‰ﺎ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﮐ‰ﺮﺍ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺮ ﻏ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﺣ‰ﺮﻓ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﭘ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺎﻥ ﻣ‰ﯽﺭﺳ‰ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ‪ \bfseries‬ﻭ }‪.\emph{first‬‬ ‫• ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺷﺮ ﻭﻉ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﻏﯿﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ &\ ﻭ \\‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۱‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺩﻩ ﻭ ﯾﮏﮐﻠﻤﻪﺍﯼ ﻭ ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪ \bfseries‬ﻭ ‪ .\itshape‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﻨﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﻏﯿﺮﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﺍﺳﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪\bfseries Thanks to Aunt Mabel for all her help.‬‬ ‫‪\bfseries{}Thanks to Aunt Mabel for all her help.‬‬ ‫‪\bfseries‬‬ ‫‪Thanks to Aunt Mabel for all her help.‬‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺣ‰ﺮﻓ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﭘ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺎﻥ ﻣ‰ﯽﺭﺳ‰ﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻧ‰ﺎﺩﯾ‰ﺪﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﮔ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﻄ‰ﻠ‰ﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑ‰ﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﯾ‰ﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﻏﯿﺮﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﻥ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺣﻔﻆ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺷﺘﻪﯼ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ‬ ‫}{ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺳﭙﺲ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺑﺮﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺖ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﻟﯿﺪ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪LATEXis fun. LATEX is fun. LATEX is fun.‬‬ ‫‪\LaTeX is fun.‬‬ ‫‪\LaTeX{} is fun. \LaTeX\ is fun.‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۲‬ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺁﺭﮔ‰ﻮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻧ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺯ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﯾ‰ﺎ ﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﺁﺭﮔ‰ﻮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱۸‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ }‪ {a,A,b,B,...,z,Z‬ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪۲۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫}‪\documentclass[12pt,a4paper]{article‬‬ ‫}‪\usepackage[leqno]{amsmath‬‬ ‫}‪\usepackage{pstricks,graphicx‬‬ ‫}‪\begin{document‬‬ ‫}‪\chapter{Banach Algebras} \label{Banach-Algebras‬‬ ‫‪A \textbf{Banach Algebra} is ...‬‬ ‫}‪\end{document‬‬ ‫ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ] [ ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‬ ‫} { ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺩﻭ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﻟﻒ( ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﯼ‪۱۹ .‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﻭ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ }‪ \vspace{1cm‬ﯾﺎ }‪ .\usepackage{amsmath‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﮑﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺻﺪﻭﺭ ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺏ( ﺁﺭﮔ‰‰‰‰ﻮﻣ‰‰‰‰ﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺍﺧ‰‰‰‰ﺘ‰‰‰‰ﯿ‰‰‰‰ﺎﺭﯼ‪۲۰ .‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾ‰‰‰‰ﻦ ﻧ‰‰‰‰ﻮﻉ ﺁﺭﮔ‰‰‰‰ﻮﻣ‰‰‰‰ﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ] [ ﺟ‰‰‰‰ﺎﯼ ﻣ‰‰‰‰ﯽﮔ‰‰‰‰ﯿ‰‰‰‰ﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻣ‰‰‰‰ﻌ‰‰‰‰ﻤ‰‰‰‰ﻮﻻً ﺑ‰‰‰‰ﻼﻓ‰‰‰‰ﺎﺻ‰‰‰‰ﻠ‰‰‰‰ﻪ ﭘ‰‰‰‰ﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓ‰‰‰‰ﺮﻣ‰‰‰‰ﺎﻥ ﻣ‰‰‰‰ﻮﺭﺩ ﻧ‰‰‰‰ﻈ‰‰‰‰ﺮ ﻭ ﻗ‰‰‰‰ﺒ‰‰‰‰ﻞ ﺍﺯ } { ﻗ‰‰‰‰ﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣ‰‰‰‰ﯽﮔ‰‰‰‰ﯿ‰‰‰‰ﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰‰‰‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﯾ‰‰‰‰ﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧ‰‰‰‰ﮑ‰‰‰‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾ‰‰‰‰ﻦ ﻧ‰‰‰‰ﻮﻉ ﺁﺭﮔ‰‰‰‰ﻮﻣ‰‰‰‰ﺎﻥ ﺑ‰‰‰‰ﻪ ﺧ‰‰‰‰ﻮﺍﺳ‰‰‰‰ﺖ‬ ‫ﮐ‰‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰‰ﺮ ﺑ‰‰ﺴ‰‰ﺘ‰‰ﮕ‰‰ﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ؛ ﻣ‰‰ﺎﻧ‰‰ﻨ‰‰ﺪ }‪ \documentclass[12pt,twocolumn]{book‬ﯾ‰‰ﺎ‬ ‫}‪ \usepackage[leqno]{amsmath‬ﻭ ﯾﺎ ]‪.\\[2cm‬‬ ‫‪۲.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻫﺰﺍﺭﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﺍﻏﻠﺐ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺑﯽﺧﺒﺮ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﻭﺟﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺯ ‪ LaTEX‬ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ‬ ‫ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑ‰ﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ ﻧ‰ﮑ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﺧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺒ‰ﺨ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﻣ‰ﮑ‰ﺎﻥ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻒ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪19 Mandatory argument‬‬ ‫‪20 Optional argument‬‬ ‫‪۲۵‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﻧﻮﯾﺴﻨﺪﻩﺍﯼ ﻗﺼﺪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﺎﺕ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻭ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﻤﻮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﯽﺩﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪﺍﺵ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ”‪ “if and only if‬ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻥ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺭﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﯼ ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻦ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ ﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ \newcommand‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{\Iff}{if and only if‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ \Iff‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮﺍً ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ‬ ‫‪ ‐۱‬ﻧﺎﻡِ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۲‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﯾﮑﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻧﺨﺴﺘﯿﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﻪﻧﻈﺮ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﯽﺭﺳ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧ‰ﺎﻡ ‪ \iff‬ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﻣ‰ﺴ‰ٔﺎﻟ‰ﻪ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ \iff‬ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺶ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻒ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ \Iff‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﮔﺰﯾﺪﻩﺍﯾﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۳‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﻣﮑﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﻣﻌﻨﯽﺩﺍﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ‬ ‫ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﻣ‰ﻌ‰ﺘ‰ﺒ‰ﺮ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﻭ ﻗ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﻞ ﺑ‰ﮑ‰ﺎﺭﮔ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﯼ ﻣ‰ﯽﺑ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ ﻭ ﺧ‰ﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻧ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﺧ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ }‪ \begin{henv-namei} ... \end{henv-namei‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۸.۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۶۷‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۴‬ﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﺨ‰ﻮﺍﻫ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﺳ‰ﺮﺍﺳ‰ﺮﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻗ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﻞ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﺑ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﻬ‰ﺘ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﮑ‰ﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻒ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ‰ﻘ‰ﺪﻣ‰ﻪﯼ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﯾ‰ﻌ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﭘ‰ﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ \documentclass‬ﻭ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ ،\begin{document‬ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲۶‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﺑﺮ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﯾﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﺨﺺ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺯﯾﻦ ﭘﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﺟﺎﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻥ ‪ \Iff‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ ،if and only if‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{\Iff}{if and only if‬‬ ‫‪A function $f:X\to Y$ is continuous \Iff{} $f^{-1}(U)$ is open in $X$,‬‬ ‫‪for every open set $U\subset Y$.‬‬ ‫‪A function f : X → Y is continuous if and only if f −1 (U ) is open in X, for every‬‬ ‫‪open set U ⊂ Y .‬‬ ‫ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪ \Iff‬ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۴.۱‬ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﻧﮕﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺭﺷﺘﻪﯼ }{ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻩﺍﯾﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪.xspace‬‬ ‫ﺑﺪﻭﻥ ﺷﮏ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﮐﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ ﺧﺘﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺭﺍ ﻧﺎﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺍﻧﮕﺎﺭﺩ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺁﺯﺍﺭﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺒ‰ﺨ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﮑ‰ﻞ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻒ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻭﺳ‰ﯿ‰ﻠ‰ﻪﯼ ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﯼ‬ ‫‪ ،[۹] ،xspace‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺣﻞ ﺍﺳﺖ؛ ﺑﻪﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪ xspace‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ }‪ \usepackage{xspace‬ﻓ‰ﺮﺍﺧ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻩ ﺳ‰ﭙ‰ﺲ‪ ،‬ﻫ‰ﻨ‰ﮕ‰ﺎﻡ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻒِ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥِ ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ \xspace‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪% in preamble: \usepackage{xspace‬‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{\USA}{United States of America\xspace‬‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{\GB}{Great Britain\xspace‬‬ ‫‪The \USA has 50 states. The \USA, \GB and Canada have close cultural links.‬‬ ‫‪The United States of America has 50 states. The United States of America, Great‬‬ ‫‪Britain and Canada have close cultural links.‬‬ ‫ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻒ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪﯼ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺁﺭﮔ‰ﻮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﺜ‰ﺎﻝ ﺍﺻ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺑ‰ﺨ‰ﺶ ﺑ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﯽﮔ‰ﺮﺩﯾ‰ﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓ‰ﺮﺽ ﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭﺕ ) ‪ (x۱ , x۲ , . . . , xn‬ﻧ‰ﯿ‰ﺰ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻣ‰ﺮﺍﺗ‰ﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ $(x_1,x_2,\ldots,x_n)$‬ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫‪۲۷‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻧﺴﺒﺘﺎً ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺯﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{\vect}{$(x_1,x_2,\ldots,x_n)$‬‬ ‫ﺕ ) ‪ (x۱ , x۲ , . . . , xn‬ﺩﺭ ﺧ‰ﺮ ﻭﺟ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﻥ ‪ \vect‬ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭ ِ‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﻦ ﺗ‰ﺮﺗ‰ﯿ‰ﺐ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩ ِ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{\vect}{$(x_1,x_2,\ldots,x_n)$‬‬ ‫‪We often write $x$ to denote \vect.‬‬ ‫‪We often write x to denote (x1 , x2 , . . . , xn ).‬‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ) ‪ (y۱ , y۲ , . . . , yn‬ﻭ ) ‪ (z۱ , z۲ , . . . , zn‬ﻧﯿﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﻪ ﺯﯾﺎﺩ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﯾﺎ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﺮ ﮐﺪﺍﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﺟﺪﺍﮔﺎﻧﻪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩ؟ ﺍﯾﻦﻃﻮﺭ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻠﮑﻪ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \vect‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{\vect}[1]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_n)$‬‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩ ‪ 1‬ﺩﺭ ]‪ [1‬ﺑﯿﺎﻥﮔﺮ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \vect‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻥ ‪ #1‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﮑﺎ ِ‬ ‫}}‪\newcommand{\R}{\mathbb{R‬‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{\vect}[1]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_n)$‬‬ ‫‪Let \vect{x} and \vect{y} be elements of $\R^n$. Then \ldots‬‬ ‫‪Let (x1 , x2 , . . . , xn ) and (y1 , y2 , . . . , yn ) be elements of Rn . Then . . .‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑ‰‰ﺎﻻﺧ‰‰ﺮﻩ ﻓ‰‰ﺮﺽ ﮐ‰‰ﻨ‰‰ﯿ‰‰ﺪ ﻧ‰‰ﻮﺷ‰‰ﺘ‰‰ﻪﯼ ﻣ‰‰ﻮﺭﺩ ﻧ‰‰ﻈ‰‰ﺮ‪ ،‬ﻋ‰‰ﻼﻭﻩ ﺑ‰‰ﺮ ﻋ‰‰ﺒ‰‰ﺎﺭﺕﻫ‰‰ﺎﯼ ) ‪،(x۱ , x۲ , . . . , xn‬‬ ‫) ‪ (y۱ , y۲ , . . . , yn‬ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ) ‪ (x۱ , x۲ , . . . , xm‬ﻭ ) ‪ (y۱ , y۲ , . . . , yp‬ﻫﻢ‬ ‫ﻫﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \vect‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖﻫﺎ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭﺑﺮ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{\vect}[2]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_#2)$‬‬ ‫ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \vect‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺩﻭ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺟﺒﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ }‪ \vect{harg1 i}{harg2 i‬ﺍﺳﺖ؛‬ ‫ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ harg1 i‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ‪ #1‬ﻭ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ harg2 i‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ‪ #2‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۲۸‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{\vect}[2]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_#2)$‬‬ ‫‪Two vectors \vect{x}{m} and \vect{y}{n} are equal if and only if $n=m$ and‬‬ ‫‪$x_i=y_i$ for $1\leq i\leq n$.‬‬ ‫‪Two vectors (x1 , x2 , . . . , xm ) and (y1 , y2 , . . . , yn ) are equal if and only if n = m and‬‬ ‫‪xi = yi for 1 ≤ i ≤ n.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ ‪ \newcommand‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﺣﺪﺍﮐﺜﺮ ‪ ۹‬ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗ ‰ﻌ‰‰ﺮ ﯾ‰‰ﻒ ﻓ‰‰ﺮﻣ‰‰ﺎﻥ ﺟ‰‰ﺪﯾ‰‰ﺪﯼ ﮐ‰‰ﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﺁﺭﮔ‰‰ﻮﻣ‰‰ﺎﻥ ﺍﺧ ‰ﺘ ‰ﯿ‰‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳ‰‰ﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺻ‰‰ﻮﺭﺕ ﮐ‰‰ﻠ‰‰ﯽ ﻓ‰‰ﺮﻣ‰‰ﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ \newcommand‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{hnew-com-namei}[hnumber i][hdefaulti]{hdefinitioni‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ‪ hnew-com-namei‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ‪ hnumber i‬ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﯼ‬ ‫}‪ {۱, ۲, . . . , ۹‬ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺧ‰ﺘ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﻋ‰ﺪﺩ ‪ hnumber i‬ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﺨ‰ﺺﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﮔ‰ﺰ ﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ hdefault i‬ﻫ‰ﻢ ﺍﺧ‰ﺘ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ ﮔ‰ﺰ ﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ hdefault i‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮔ‰ﺮﺩﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﻧﺨﺴﺘﯿﻦ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮ‪ ،‬ﻫ‰ﻨ‰ﮕ‰ﺎﻡ ﺻ‰ﺎﺩﺭ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﮔ‰ﻮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﺍﺧ‰ﺘ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧ‰ﺸ‰ﻮﺩ‪ LaTEX ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﺒﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ‪ hdefault i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ‪hdefault i‬‬ ‫ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻣﻌﻨﯽﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ‪ hnumber i‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\newcommand{\vect}[1][x]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_n)$‬‬ ‫‪\vect \qquad \vect[y] \qquad \vect[z] \par‬‬ ‫}‪\renewcommand{\vect}[2][x]{$(#1_1,#1_2,\ldots,#1_#2)$‬‬ ‫}‪\vect{n} \qquad \vect[y]{m} \qquad \vect[z]{p‬‬ ‫) ‪(z1 , z2 , . . . , zn‬‬ ‫) ‪(z1 , z2 , . . . , zp‬‬ ‫) ‪(y1 , y2 , . . . , yn‬‬ ‫) ‪(y1 , y2 , . . . , ym‬‬ ‫) ‪(x1 , x2 , . . . , xn‬‬ ‫) ‪(x1 , x2 , . . . , xn‬‬ ‫‪۲۹‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻓ‰‰ﺮﻣ‰‰ﺎﻥ ‪.\renewcommand‬‬ ‫ﻫ‰‰ﻤ‰‰ﺎﻥﻃ‰‰ﻮﺭ ﮐ‰‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣ‰‰ﺜ‰‰ﺎﻝ ﺑ‰‰ﺎﻻ ﻣ‰‰ﻼﺣ‰‰ﻈ‰‰ﻪ ﻣ‰‰ﯽﺷ‰‰ﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳ‰‰ﺘ‰‰ﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ \renewcommand‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﻭﺑ‰ﺎﺭﻩ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮﯾ‰ﻒ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﯽ ﻣ‰ﻮﺟ‰ﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺶ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮﯾ‰ﻒ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\renewcommand{hold-com-namei}[hnumber i][hdefaulti]{hdefinitioni‬‬ ‫ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﻪ ﭼ‰ﯿ‰ﺰ ﻣ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ \newcommand‬ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺟ‰ﺰ ﺁﻧ‰ﮑ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﺠ‰ﺎ ‪ hold-com-namei‬ﻧ‰ﺎﻡ ﯾ‰ﮏ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪ \vect‬ﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﮐﺎﺭﺍﯾﯽ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺘﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﻭ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۶.۳‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۸۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎ ﻗ‰ﺴ‰ﻤ‰ﺘ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺑ‰ﻪﻋ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺭﮔ‰ﻮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﺩﺭ ﯾ‰ﺎﻓ‰ﺖ ﻣ‰ﯽﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﻭ ﻋ‰ﻤ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ }‪ \textit{htext i‬ﮐﻪ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ italic‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻋ‰ﻤ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ ﺍﻧ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﻡ ﺩﻫ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﺍﻥ ﭘ‰ﺴ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪﻩ ﻧ‰ﯿ‰ﺴ‰ﺖ ﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ﻃ‰ﻮﻻﻧ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻋ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﺭﮔ‰ﻮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻣ‰ﯽﮐ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﺪﻭﺩ ﮔ‰ﺮﺩﺩ؛ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﻋ‰ﻼﻭﻩ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﮑ‰ﻼﺕ ﻓ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺧ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ ِ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦﺭ ﻭ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺳ‰ﺎﺧ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺭ ﺩﯾ‰ﮕ‰ﺮﯼ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻧ‰ﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ‪۲۱‬‬ ‫ﻓ‰ﺮﺍﻫ‰ﻢ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ‬ ‫}‪ \begin{henv-namei‬ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ \end{henv-namei‬ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﯾﺎﺑﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ‬ ‫‪ henv-namei‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ }‪ {a,A,b,B,. . . ,z,Z‬ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺧﺎﺻﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ \textit{htext i‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﻂ ‪ itshape‬ﺑﻪﺷﮑﻞ‬ ‫ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ italic‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﯿ ِ‬ ‫‪21 Environment‬‬ ‫‪۳۰‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫}‪\begin{itshape‬‬ ‫‪htext i‬‬ ‫}‪\end{itshape‬‬ ‫ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ italic‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻫﺮﺩﻭ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﯾﮏ ﺟﻤﻠﻪﯼ ﮐﻮﺗﺎﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \textit‬ﻭ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ‪htext i‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ itshape‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻭﻟ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻄ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫ‰ﻨ‰ﮕ‰ﺎﻡ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺎ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﺑ‰ﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺭ ﻭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻭ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮ ﯾ‰ﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣ‰ﻬ‰ﻤ‰ﺘ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻦ ﻭ ﺍﺻ‰ﻠ‰ﯽﺗ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻦ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ﺩﺭ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﯾ‰ﻌ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ‪ document‬ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺁﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﺷ‰ﻮﺩ ﺑ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺪ ﺩﺭ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ‪ ،document‬ﯾ‰ﻌ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﭘ‰ﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ }‪ \begin{document‬ﻭ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ‬ ‫}‪ ،\end{document‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ \end{document‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﻧﺎﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ \begin{document‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ‬ ‫}‪Missing \begin{document‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﺠ‰ﺎ ﮔ‰ﺮﺩﺍﯾ‰ﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣ‰ﻬ‰ﻤ‰ﺘ‰ﺮﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺶ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮﯾ‰ﻒ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪document‬‬ ‫‪itemize‬‬ ‫‪table‬‬ ‫‪displaymath‬‬ ‫‪flushright‬‬ ‫‪quote‬‬ ‫‪verse‬‬ ‫‪description‬‬ ‫‪flushleft‬‬ ‫‪quotation‬‬ ‫‪verbatim‬‬ ‫‪center‬‬ ‫‪figure‬‬ ‫‪minipage‬‬ ‫‪titlepage‬‬ ‫‪array‬‬ ‫‪equation‬‬ ‫‪math‬‬ ‫‪thebibliography‬‬ ‫‪abstract‬‬ ‫‪enumerate‬‬ ‫‪letter‬‬ ‫‪tabular‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺮﯼ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ abstract‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ‪ article‬ﻭ ‪ report‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧ‰ﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺪﺍ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﭼ‰ﮑ‰ﯿ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﻪﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﻣ‰ﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ؛ ﺑ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﻌ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﮐ‰ﻪ ﭼ‰ﮑ‰ﯿ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﻧ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ‪ abstract‬ﺟ‰ﺎﯼ ﻣ‰ﯽﮔ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦﺑ‰ﺎﺭﻩ ﺑ‰ﺨ‰ﺶ ‪ ۳.۴‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۲۶۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ array‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮﺍً ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﯿﺪﻥ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﻭ ﻋﻼﯾﻢ‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫‪۳۱‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺁﺭﺍﯾﺸﯽ ﺑﺎ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﻭ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﺎﺗﺮﯾﺲﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﯽﺗ‰ﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ‪ array‬ﺑ‰ﻬ‰ﺮﻩ ﮔ‰ﺮﻓ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦﺑ‰ﺎﺭﻩ ﺑ‰ﺨ‰ﺶ ‪ ۹.۴.۳‬ﺩﺭ ﺻ‰ﻔ‰ﺤ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۶۵‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ center‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺳﻂﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ center‬ﺟﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﯽﮔ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧ‰ﺮ ﻭﺟ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻓ‰ﺎﺻ‰ﻠ‰ﻪﯼ ﻣ‰ﺴ‰ﺎﻭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺣ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﭼ‰ﭗ ﻭ ﺭﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭ ﻣ‰ﯽﮔ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۱.۴.۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۹۳‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ description‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﯽ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۳.۵.۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۱۷‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ‬ ‫‪ displaymath‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ِ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۱.۳‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۵۰‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ document‬ﺍﺻﻠﯽﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺪﻧﻪﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ document‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ enumerate‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﭘ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓ‰ﻬ‰ﺮﺳ‰ﺖﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﺷ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﻣ‰ﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦﺑ‰ﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۲.۵.۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۱۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ equation‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﻮﻝﻫ‰ﺎ ﻭ ﻣ‰ﻌ‰ﺎﺩﻟ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺭﯾ‰ﺎﺿ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺳﻮﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۱۰.۳‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۲۰۵‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ figure‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﭘ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺷ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞﻫ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳ‰ﻮﯼ‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺼﻞ ‪ ۷‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ flushleft‬ﻭ ‪ flushright‬ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ‪ flushleft‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺍﻧ‰ﺪﻥ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺣ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﻪﯼ ﺳ‰ﻤ‰ﺖ ﭼ‰ﭗ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ flushright‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻥ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۲.۴.۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۹۴‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ itemize‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﻪﻫﻢﺭﯾﺨﺘﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺗﺼﺎﺩﻓﯽ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۱.۵.۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۰۶‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪ letter‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮﺍً ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ‪ letter‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۲.۱.۴‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۲۵۵‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ math‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‐ﺧﻄﯽ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۱.۳‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۵۰‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ minipage‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﭘ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺟ‰ﻌ‰ﺒ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﭘ‰ﺎﺭﺍﮔ‰ﺮﺍﻓ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﻣ‰ﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦﺑ‰ﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۸.۶.۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۴۹‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫‪ quotation‬ﻭ ‪ quote‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ِ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ؛ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻘﻞ ﻗﻮﻝ ﻣﺴﺘﻘﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۳.۴.۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪۹۶‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ table‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﭘ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺟ‰ﺪﻭﻝﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺷ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﻭﺭ ﻭ ﺟ‰ﺪﻭﻝﻫ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺍﺯ ﺳ‰ﻮﯼ‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺼﻞ ‪ ۷‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ tabular‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۶.۲‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪۱۱۸‬‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ thebibliography‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎﻣﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۱.۶.۴‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۲۷۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ verbatim‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﭼﺎﭖ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﻟﻔﻆ ‪۲۲‬‬ ‫ﻦ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ؛ ﺑﺪﯾﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘ ِ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ ،verbatim‬ﻋﯿﻨ ﺎً ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﯾﺸﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۱۱.۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ verse‬ﺍﯾ‰‰ﻦ ﻣ‰‰ﺤ‰‰ﯿ‰‰ﻂ ﺑ‰‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺣ‰‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰‰ﭽ‰‰ﯿ‰‰ﻨ‰‰ﯽ ﺷ‰‰ﻌ‰‰ﺮ ﺑ‰‰ﻪﮐ‰‰ﺎﺭ ﻣ‰‰ﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰‰ﻦﺑ‰‰ﺎﺭﻩ ﺑ‰‰ﺨ‰‰ﺶ ‪ ۴.۴.۲‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۰۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪22 Verbatim‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪۳۳‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫‪۴.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺟﺎﻧﺒﯽ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺁﻭﺭﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻧ‰ﮑ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﻮﺿ‰ﻮﻉ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺶﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦﺭ ﻭ ﺍﻣ‰ﮑ‰ﺎﻥ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻒ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂﻫ‰ﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻓ‰ﺮﺍﻫ‰ﻢ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﮐ‰ﻤ‰ﮏ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ \newenvironment‬ﻗ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﻞ ﺍﻧ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪\newenvironment{hnew-env-namei}[hnumber i][hdefaulti]%‬‬ ‫}‪{hbegin-def i‬‬ ‫}‪{hend-def i‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ‪ hnew-env-namei‬ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﻣﯽﮔﺰﯾﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮﺍً ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻓﯽ }‪ {a,A,b,B,. . . ,z,Z‬ﺗﺸﮑﯿﻞ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮑﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ parbox‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \parbox‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ‬ ‫‪Command \parbox already defined‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ hnumber i‬ﻋ‰‰ﺪﺩﯼ ﺍﺳ‰‰ﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻣ‰‰ﺠ‰‰ﻤ‰‰ﻮﻋ‰‰ﻪﯼ }‪ {۱, ۲, . . . , ۹‬ﮐ‰‰ﻪ ﻣ‰‰ﺸ‰‰ﺨ‰‰ﺺﮐ‰‰ﻨ‰‰ﻨ‰‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﺗ‰‰ﻌ‰‰ﺪﺍﺩ‬ ‫ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ‪ hnumber i‬ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻫﯿﭻ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽﭘﺬﯾﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﮔ‰ﺰ ﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ hdefault i‬ﻫ‰ﻢ ﺍﺧ‰ﺘ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﮔ‰ﺰ ﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﻪ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷ‰ﻮﺩ ﺁﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﺎﻩ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﻧﺨﺴﺘﯿﻦ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ‬ ‫ﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ‪ ،‬ﻫ‰ﻨ‰ﮕ‰ﺎﻡ ﻓ‰ﺮﺍﺧ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﯽ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﮔ‰ﺰ ﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﻪﯼ ﺍﺧ‰ﺘ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﻧ‰ﺸ‰ﻮﺩ‪LaTEX ،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ‪ hdefault i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ‪ hdefault i‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﻣﻌﻨﯽﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ‪ hnumber i‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ‪ hbegin-def i‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ hend-def i‬ﮐﺎﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻻً ﺩﺭ ‪ hbegin-def i‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ hend-def i‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‬ ‫ﺶ ﺭ ﻭ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﯿ ِ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪.۱‬‬ ‫ﻂ ‪ hold-namei‬ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪﻣﺮﺍﺗﺐ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ﻣﺤﯿ ِ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻨﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻻﯾﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺩﻭﺳﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪ hnew-namei‬ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ hnew-namei‬ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﺎﺭﮐﺮﺩ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ hold-namei‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫}}‪\newenvironment{hnew-namei}{\begin{hold-namei}}{\end{hold-namei‬‬ ‫ﻂ ‪ hnew-namei‬ﻫﻢﺍﺭ ﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ hold-namei‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﻣﺤﯿ ِ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪.۲‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۲.۱‬ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ itabstract‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﭼﮑﯿﺪﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ italic‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ‪.۳‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۳.۱‬ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪﯼ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ‪ namedthm‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﻬﻮﺭ ﺑﻪ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻥ *‪ \newtheorem‬ﺳﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﻪﺍﯾﻢ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺟﺰﺋﯿﺎﺕ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۲۰.۳‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۲۲۹‬ﺭﺍ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ‪ namedthm‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺁﻥ ﻫﻢ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ‪ ،‬ﻭﺍﮊﻩﯼ ‪ Theorem‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ .\renewenvironment‬ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻥﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺑ‰ﺘ‰ﺪﺍ ﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﻥ ﺷ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧ‰ﺎﻡ ﺍﻧ‰ﺘ‰ﺨ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﺑ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺪ ﯾ‰ﮑ‰ﺘ‰ﺎ ﺑ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺶ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻒ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﻧ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﮔ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺎ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺩﻻﯾ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﻧ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺯ‬ ۳۵ ‫ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬۶.۱ \newenvironment{itabstract}% {\begin{center} \textsc{Abstract} \end{center} \begin{quote} \itshape} {\end{quote}} \begin{itabstract} We consider when certain Banach sequence algebras $A$ on the set $N$ are approximately amenable. Some general results are obtained, and we resolve the special cases where $A = \ell^p$ for $1\leq p < \infty$. \end{itabstract} \section{Introduction} The concept of amenability for a Banach algebra $A$, introduced by Johnson in 1972. Abstract We consider when certain Banach sequence algebras A on the set N are approximately amenable. Some general results are obtained, and we resolve the special cases where A = ℓp for 1 ≤ p < ∞. 1 Introduction The concept of amenability for a Banach algebra A, introduced by Johnson in 1972. ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﭼﮑﯿﺪﻩ‬:۲.۱ ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﺷﮑ‬ ‫ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬.۱‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬ ۳۶ \newcommand{\thisname}{} \newtheorem*{thisthm}{\thisname} \newenvironment{namedthm}[1][Theorem]% {\renewcommand{\thisname}{#1}\begin{thisthm}}{\end{thisthm}} \begin{namedthm}[The Hausdorff Maximal Principle] Every partially ordered set has a maximal linearly ordered subset. \end{namedthm} \begin{namedthm}[Zorn Lemma] If $X$ is a partially ordered set and every linearly ordered subset of $X$ has an upper bound, then $X$ has a maximal element. \end{namedthm} \begin{namedthm} Let $X$ be a compact space. If $f:X\to\mathbb{R}$ is continuous then there exist $p,q\in X$ such that, for every $x\in X$, $f(p)\leq f(x) \leq f(q)$. \end{namedthm} The Hausdorff Maximal Principle. Every partially ordered set has a maximal linearly ordered subset. Zorn Lemma. If X is a partially ordered set and every linearly ordered subset of X has an upper bound, then X has a maximal element. Theorem. Let X be a compact space. If f : X → R is continuous then there exist p, q ∈ X such that, for every x ∈ X, f (p) ≤ f (x) ≤ f (q). ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ‬:۳.۱ ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﺷﮑ‬ ‫‪۳۷‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ؛ ﻣﺜ ﻼً ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ‬ ‫ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫‪ \renewenvironment‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﻪﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪\renewenvironment{hold-env-namei}[hnumber i][hdefaulti]%‬‬ ‫}‪{hbegin-def i‬‬ ‫}‪{hend-def i‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻪ ﭼﯿﺰ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \newenvironment‬ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﺰ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ‪ hold-env-namei‬ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۵.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﯾ‰ﮑ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﻬ‰ﺎﯼ ﻣ‰ﻮﺭﺩ ﻋ‰ﻼﻗ‰ﻪﯼ ﺧ‰ﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺯ ﺑ‰ﺎﻥ ﺍﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﻠ‰ﯿ‰ﺴ‰ﯽ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻗ‰ﻔ‰ﺴ‰ﻪ‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺷ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺗ‰ﻮﺭ ﻕ ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯿ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﺪﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ ﺍﺟ‰ﺰﺍﯼ ﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﺎ ﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺏ ﻫ‰ﺴ‰ﺖ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻩﮔ‰ﺬﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺍﻋﻢ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﺍﮔﺮ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻒﻫ‰ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟ‰ﻢﻫ‰ﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗ‰ﻀ‰ﯿ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎ ﻭ ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣ‰ﻌ‰ﺎﺩﻟ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻩﮔ‰ﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺣ‰ﺎﻝ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﭼ‰ﮕ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﭘﯿﺸﮕﻔﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺐ ﻭ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺁﻥ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﯾﻮﻧﺎﻧﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮏ } ‪ {i, ii, iii, . . .‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯼ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺍﻭﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ } ‪ {1, 2, 3, . . .‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ } ‪ {1, 2, 3, . . .‬ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﯾﻮﻧﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ ‪{I, II, III,‬‬ ‫} ‪ . . .‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻩﮔ‰ﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺑ‰ﺨ‰ﺶﻫ‰ﺎ‪ ،‬ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓ‰ﺼ‰ﻞ ﺟ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ﻧ‰ﯿ‰ﺰ ﻟ‰ﺤ‰ﺎﻅ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻋ‰ﻼﻭﻩ‪ ،‬ﻫ‰ﺮﮔ‰ﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫‪2.1, 2.2, 2.3, . . .‬‬ ‫‪1.1, 1.2, 1.3, . . .‬‬ ‫‪۳۸‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫• ﺍﺣ‰ﺘ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻻً ﺩﺭ ﭘ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺎﻥ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺏ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﺖﻫ‰ﺎ ﻭ ﺿ‰ﻤ‰ﯿ‰ﻤ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺑ‰ﺰ ﺭﮒ ﺍﻟ‰ﻔ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﯼ ﺍﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﻠ‰ﯿ‰ﺴ‰ﯽ‬ ‫} ‪ {A, B, C, . . .‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﻣ‰ﺮ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻩﮔ‰ﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺧ‰ﻮﺩﮐ‰ﺎﺭ‪ LaTEX ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺗ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﭼ‰ﺸ‰ﻤ‰ﮕ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﯼ ﺑ‰ﺮﺧ‰ﻮﺭﺩﺍﺭ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻗ‰ﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺑﻪﺩﺭﺳﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻧﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺗﻮﺍﻧﺎﯾﯽﻫﺎﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﯿﭽﮕﺎﻩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯﯼ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ LaTEX .‬ﻗﺎﺩﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﺮ ﺷﯿﺌﯽ ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺷﯿﻮﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﮐﻨﺪ؛ ﺍﺯ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻫﺮ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺁﻥ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺯﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﯾﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺗﻤﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﭼﻪ ﺟﺰﺋﯽ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﯽ ‪ section‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪enumi‬‬ ‫‪enumii‬‬ ‫‪enumiii‬‬ ‫‪enumiv‬‬ ‫‪figure‬‬ ‫‪table‬‬ ‫‪footnote‬‬ ‫‪mpfootnote‬‬ ‫‪paragraph‬‬ ‫‪subparagraph‬‬ ‫‪page‬‬ ‫‪equation‬‬ ‫‪part‬‬ ‫‪chapter‬‬ ‫‪section‬‬ ‫‪subsection‬‬ ‫‪subsubsection‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺘﻈﺎﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﻢ ﺷﯿﺌﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﯾﺎ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻣﺨﺼﻮﺹ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻓﺼﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ hchapter-titlei‬ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ \chapter{hchapter-titlei‬ﺑﮑﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ }‪ \begin{equation} ... \end{equation‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﺪﯾﺪﺁﻭﺭ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﯽﺀ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ LaTEX ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ‪chapter‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ‪ equation‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺁﻥ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪ hcounter i‬ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪۳۹‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ \value{hcounter i‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ) ﺍﻣﺎ ﻧﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ! ( ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﻗﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \thehcounter i‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻭ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ‪ chapter‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫‪ ۴‬ﻭ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ‪ section‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ۳‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ‪chapter‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ IV‬ﻭ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ‪ section‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ‪ IV.3‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﭘ‰ﻨ‰ﺞ ﻗ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﺐ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺶ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻩﻫ‰ﺎ ﻭﺟ‰ﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟ‰ﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ۲.۱‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺻ‰ﻔ‰ﺤ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ ۳۹‬ﮔ‰ﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﺨ‰ﻮﺍﻫ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﺘ‰ﻮﺍﯼ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻧ‰ﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﯾ‰ﮑ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻟﺐﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ۲.۱‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﯾﺎﺑﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺮﯾﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪arabic‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﻋﺮﺑﯽ } ‪ {1, 2, 3, . . .‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪roman‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﯾﻮﻧﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻮﭼﮏ } ‪ {i, ii, iii, . . .‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Roman‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭﻗﺎﻡ ﯾﻮﻧﺎﻧﯽ ﺑﺰ ﺭﮒ } ‪ {I, II, III, . . .‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪alph‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻗ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻧ‰ﺪﻩ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐ‰ﻮﭼ‰ﮏ ﺍﻟ‰ﻔ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﯼ ﺍﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﻠ‰ﯿ‰ﺴ‰ﯽ } ‪{a, b, c, . . .‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۲۶‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪Alph‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻗ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻧ‰ﺪﻩ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺑ‰ﺰ ﺭﮒ ﺍﻟ‰ﻔ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﯼ ﺍﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﻠ‰ﯿ‰ﺴ‰ﯽ } ‪{A, B, C, . . .‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۲۶‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪fnsymbol‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﻭﺭﻗﯽ‬ ‫‡‡‬ ‫∗‪،†† ،∗∗ ،k ،¶ ،§ ،‡ ،† ،‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺑﯿﻦ ‪ ۱‬ﺗﺎ ‪ ۹‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻝ ‪ :۲.۱‬ﻗﺎﻟﺐ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺸﯽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭ ِ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺳﻮﻡ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺼﻞ ﭼﻬﺎﺭﻡ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ \Alph{chapter‬ﺻﺎﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻓﺼﻞ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ D‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪\roman{section‬‬ ‫‪۴۰‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺑﺨﺶ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ‪ iii‬ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۴.۱‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\setcounter{hcounter i}{hvaluei‬‬ ‫}}‪\setcounter{hcounter1 i}{\value{hcounter2 i‬‬ ‫}‪\addtocounter{hcounter i}{hvaluei‬‬ ‫}}‪\addtocounter{hcounter1 i}{\value{hcounter2 i‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ ﻭ ﺳﻮﻡ ‪ hvaluei‬ﯾﮏ ﻋﺪﺩ ﺻﺤﯿﺢ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﻭﻣﯿﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ‪ hcounter1 i‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ‪ hcounter2 i‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳﻮﻣﯿﻦ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺭ ﺯﺵ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ‪ hcounter i‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ hvaluei‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﯿ‰ﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭼ‰ﮕ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﯽ ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺶ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻧ‰ﺪﻩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼ‰ﮕ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﯽ ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺶ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻧ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ‪ hcounter i‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒِ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \thehcounter i‬ﻧﻬﻔﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ‬ ‫‪ hcounter i‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾ ﻒِ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \thehcounter i‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺩﺳﺘﻮﺭ‬ ‫‪ ،\renewcommand‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۴.۱‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \newcounter‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪\newcounter{hnew-counter i}[hold-counter i‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﺠ‰ﺎ ‪ hnew-counter i‬ﻧ‰ﺎﻡ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻧ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﺟ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﺍﻧ‰ﺘ‰ﺨ‰ﺎﺏ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﻧﻤﺎﯾﺪ ﻭ ‪ hold-counter i‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﺮﺩ ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺮﮔﺰﯾﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﯾﮑﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻧﺸﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ۴۱ ‫ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬۶.۱ \setcounter{section}{5} \setcounter{subsection}{3} \setcounter{equation}{8} \renewcommand{\thesection}{\Alph{section}} \renewcommand{\thesubsection}{\thesection.\Roman{subsection}} \renewcommand{\theequation}{\thesubsection-\arabic{equation}} \subsection{Counters} \verb|\thesection|=\thesection,\hspace{\fill} \verb|\alph{section}|=\alph{section} \\ \verb|\thesubsection|=\thesubsection,\hspace{\fill} \verb|\arabic{subsection}|=\arabic{subsection} \\ \verb|\theequation|=\theequation,\hspace{\fill} \verb|\roman{equation}|=\roman{equation} \subsection{Conclusion} Therefore, \begin{equation} a^2+b^2=c^2 \end{equation} E.IV Counters \thesection=E, \thesubsection=E.IV, \theequation=E.IV-8, E.V \alph{section}=e \arabic{subsection}=4 \roman{equation}=viii Conclusion Therefore, a2 + b 2 = c2 ‫ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﯾﮏ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩ‬:۴.۱ ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﺷﮑ‬ (E.V-9) ‫‪۴۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ hold-counter i‬ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ‪ hold-counter i‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻫﺮﮔﺎﻩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ‪ hold-counter i‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺵ ﺩﺭ ‪ hnew-counter i‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺭﺍﺑﻄﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎﯼ ‪ section‬ﻭ ‪ chapter‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ‪ book‬ﻭ ‪.report‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺗﺮﺗﯿﺐ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻧﺪﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﻓﺼﻞﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫‪ book.cls‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺣﺘﻤﺎﻻً‪ ،‬ﭼﯿﺰﯼ ﺷﺒﯿﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\newcounter{chapter‬‬ ‫]‪\newcounter{section}[chapter‬‬ ‫]‪\newcounter{subsection}[section‬‬ ‫}}‪\newcommand{\thechapter}{\arabic{chapter‬‬ ‫}}‪\newcommand{\thesection}{\thechapter.\arabic{section‬‬ ‫}}‪\newcommand{\thesubsection}{\thesection.\arabic{subsection‬‬ ‫‪۶.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ‪ LaTEX‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻃﻼﻋﺎﺕ ﻓﺮﺍﻭﺍﻧﯽ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﻬ‰ﻤ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺍﻃ‰ﻼﻋ‰ﺎﺕ ﻣ‰ﺮ ﺑ‰ﻮﻁ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺍﻧ‰ﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﺍﺑ‰ﻌ‰ﺎﺩ ﮐ‰ﺎﻏ‰ﺬ‪ ،‬ﻓ‰ﺎﺻ‰ﻠ‰ﻪﯼ ﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ‬ ‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‪ ،‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻃﻮﻝ ﻫﺮ ﺧﻂ ﻭ ﺻﺪﻫﺎ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻧﺤﻮﻩﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺩﺧﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻭ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻪ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺁﺷﮑﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺷﺮﺍﯾﻂ‪ ،‬ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺟ‰ﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ۳.۱‬ﮔ‰ﺮﺩﺍﯾ‰ﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣ‰ﻬ‰ﻤ‰ﺘ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺶ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻒ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﺎﻧﺪﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺟﻤﻊﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۱.۵‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ،۳۰۱‬ﻫﻢ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﻡ ﻫﺮ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﯽ ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ۴.۱‬ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪\paperwith‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‬ ‫‪\paperheigh‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﮐﺎﻏﺬ‬ ‫‪\oddsidemargin‬‬ ‫‪\evensidemargin‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﭼﭗ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﯾﮏﺭ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﭼﭗ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺯ ﻭﺝ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻭ‬ ‫‪\textwidth‬‬ ‫ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻧﻪﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪\topmargin‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﯼ ﺑﺎﻻﯾﯽ‬ ‫‪\textheigh‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺑﺪﻧﻪﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪\linewidth‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ‬ ‫‪\parindent‬‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺍﺯ ﻫﺮ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ‬ ‫‪\mathindent‬‬ ‫‪۴۳‬‬ ‫ﺟﻠﻮﻩ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯿﺰﺍﻥ ﺗﻮﺭﻓﺘﮕﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ِ‬ ‫ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ‪ fleqn‬ﺑﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \documentclass‬ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻝ ‪ :۳.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭ ِ‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪۴۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﯿﺮﯼ‬ ‫)‪pt (point‬‬ ‫)‪sp (scaled point‬‬ ‫ﺷﺮﺡ‬ ‫‪۱ pt = ۰/۰۱۳۸۳۷ in = ۰/۳۵۱ mm‬‬ ‫ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ‪۶۵۵۳۶ sp = ۱ pt ،LaTEX‬‬ ‫)‪bp (big point‬‬ ‫‪۷۲ bp = ۱ in‬‬ ‫)‪mm (milimeter‬‬ ‫‪۱ mm = ۲/۸۴۵ pt‬‬ ‫)‪pc (pica‬‬ ‫‪۱ pc = ۱۲ pt = ۴/۲۱۸ mm‬‬ ‫)‪cm (centimeter‬‬ ‫‪۱ cm = ۱۰ mm = ۲/۳۷۱ pc‬‬ ‫)‪in (inch‬‬ ‫‪۱ in = ۲۵/۴ mm = ۷۲/۲۷ pt‬‬ ‫‪ex‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒﺎً ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ x‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ‬ ‫‪em‬‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺮﯾﺒًﺎ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺣﺮﻑ ‪ M‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ‬ ‫‪mu‬‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺩﺭﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ‪۱۸ mu = ۱ em ،‬‬ ‫ﻝ ‪ :۴.۱‬ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭ ِ‬ ‫‪۴۵‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﺁﺳﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\setlength{hlength-var i}{hlenght i‬‬ ‫}‪\setlength{hlength-var1 i}{hlength-var2 i‬‬ ‫}‪\addtolength{hlength-var i}{hlenght i‬‬ ‫}‪\addtolength{hlength-var1 i}{hlength-var2 i‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﺠ‰ﺎ ‪ hlength-var i‬ﻧ‰ﺎﻡ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﺮ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﮐ‰ﺮﺍ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺮ \ ﺁﻏ‰ﺎﺯ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ ﻭ‬ ‫‪ hlengthi‬ﯾﮏ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ۴.۱‬ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻋﺮﺽ ﺑﺪﻧﻪﯼ ﺍﺻﻠﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ ۱۴‬ﺳﺎﻧﺘﯽﻣﺘﺮ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ \setlength{\textwidth}{14cm‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻟﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۵.۱‬ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﺨ‰ﻮﺍﻫ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ ﻓ‰ﺎﺻ‰ﻠ‰ﻪﯼ ﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ ﺧ‰ﻄ‰ﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﻣ‰ﻮﺿ‰ﻌ‰ﯽ ﺗ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﯿ‰ﺮ ﺩﻫ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ‪ ،‬ﺗ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﯿ‰ﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﺮ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ‬ ‫‪ ،\baselineskip‬ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺮﺍﻩ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﻭﻩﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﯼ ﻣ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﺳ‰ﺐ‪ ،‬ﮔ‰ﺰ ﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﻪﯼ ﺧ‰ﻮ ﺑ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪﻧ‰ﻈ‰ﺮ ﻣ‰ﯽﺭﺳ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣ‰ﺎ ﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺳﺮﺍﺳﺮﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﻫﯿﻢ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﺟﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﮑﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ‪ ،\baselineskip‬ﺿﺮﯾﺐ ﺁﻥ ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ‪ \baselinestretch‬ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ،\renewcommand‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\renewcommand{\baselinestretch}{hci‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﺠ‰ﺎ ‪ hci‬ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻣ‰ﻘ‰ﺪﺍﺭ ﻣ‰ﺜ‰ﺒ‰ﺖ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮ ‪ hci‬ﺩﺭ ﺑ‰ﺎﺯﻩﯼ )‪ (۰, ۱‬ﺑ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ ﺧ‰ﻄ‰ﻮﻁ ﺑ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﻢ ﻧ‰ﺰﺩﯾ‰ﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ ﻭ ﺍﮔﺮ ‪ hci‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻩﯼ )∞ ‪ (۱,‬ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﺩﻭﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺟﺪﯾﺪ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \newlength‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\newlength{hnew-length-var i‬‬ ۴۶ ‫ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬.۱‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬ \verb|\baselineskip| is a length command which specifies the minimum space between the bottom of two successive lines in a paragraph. Its value may be automatically reset by \LaTeX, for example, by font changes in the text. \addtolength{\baselineskip}{1.5ex} \verb|\baselinestretch| scales the value of \verb|\baselineskip|. Its default value is $1.0$ but it may be reset with a \verb|\renewcommand| command. If one wants to change the spacing in a document one should reset \verb|\baselinestretch| and not \verb|\baselineskip| as the latter may be reset automatically by \LaTeX{} to account for local variations in the text, but it is always scaled by the former. \baselineskip is a length command which specifies the minimum space between the bottom of two successive lines in a paragraph. Its value may be automatically reset by LATEX, for example, by font changes in the text. \baselinestretch scales the value of \baselineskip. Its default value is 1.0 but it may be reset with a \renewcommand command. If one wants to change the spacing in a document one should reset \baselinestretch and not \baselineskip as the latter may be reset automatically by LATEX to account for local variations in the text, but it is always scaled by the former. ‫ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺑﯿﻦ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ‬:۵.۱ ِ‫ﺷﮑﻞ‬ ۴۷ ‫ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬۶.۱ ‫ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﺎﻡ‬.‫ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻟﺨﻮﺍﻩ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‬hnew-length-var i ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ‬ .‫ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩ ﻧﺒﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ \ ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬LaTEX ‫ ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﺒﻞ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬،‫ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﯾﮑﺘﺎ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫\ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ‬thehlength-var i ‫ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ .‫ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‬ .‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‬۶.۱ ‫ ﺷﮑﻞ‬.‫ ﺭﺍ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩ‬hlength-var i ‫ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‬ \sffamily \verb|\oddsidemargin| = \the\oddsidemargin \hfill \verb|\textwidth| = \the\textwidth \\[1ex] \newlength{\mylen}\setlength{\mylen}{1em} 1em = \the\mylen \hfill \addtolength{\mylen}{1ex} 1em + 1ex = \the\mylen \\[1ex] \settowidth{\mylen}{abc} width of abc = \the\mylen \hfill \settowidth{\mylen}{ABC} width of ABC = \the\mylen \\ [1ex] \settowidth{\mylen}{\Large ABC} width of {\Large ABC} = \the\mylen \oddsidemargin = 34.42784pt 1em = 10.00002pt width of abc = 14.69447pt width of \textwidth = 369.31221pt 1em + 1ex = 14.44446pt width of ABC = 19.72227pt ABC = 27.68298pt ‫ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‬:۶.۱ ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﺷﮑ‬ ‫ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺫﺧ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﻩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﻋ‰ﺮﺽ ﺷ‰ﯽﺀ‬،‫ ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﮐ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ‬،‫ ﺩﯾ‰ﺪﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‬۶.۱ ‫ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻥﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞ‬ ‫ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬hlength-var i ‫ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‬hobject i \settowidth{hlength-var i}{hobject i} ‫ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‬hobject i ‫ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﻭ ﻋﻤﻖ ﺷﯽﺀ‬،‫ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺸﺎﺑﻪ‬.‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‬ .‫ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‬hlength-var i \settoheight{hlength-var i}{hobject i} \settodepth{hlength-var i}{hobject i} ‫‪۴۸‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫‪۷.۶.۱‬‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﺷﻨﺎﯾﯽ ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺎ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﻧﻌﻄﺎﻑﭘﺬﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺍﺯ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺗﻌﺮﯾﻒ ﺷﺪﻩﯼ‬ ‫‪ \smallskipamount‬ﻭ ‪ \bigskipamount‬ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪\smallskip‬‬ ‫ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ‪ \smallskipamount‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ ﻭ ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \bigskip‬ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ‪ \bigskipamount‬ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻗﺴﻤﺖ ﻗﺒﻞ ﻣﯽﺩﺍﻧﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺫﺧﯿﺮﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪،\the‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫‪\hspace{\fill} \the\bigskipamount‬‬ ‫‪12.0pt plus 4.0pt minus 4.0pt‬‬ ‫‪\sffamily‬‬ ‫‪\the\smallskipamount‬‬ ‫‪3.0pt plus 1.0pt minus 1.0pt‬‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ‪ \smallskipamount‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 3pt‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ‪ 1pt‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ‪ 1pt‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ‪ \bigskipamount‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ 12pt‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﻟﺒﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ‬ ‫‪ 4pt‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ‪ 4pt‬ﻫﻢ ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﻭ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﺮ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ ‪ \smallskipamount‬ﻭ ‪ \bigskipamount‬ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﻧ‰ﻌ‰ﻄ‰ﺎﻑﭘ‰ﺬﯾ‰ﺮ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ LaTEX .‬ﺍﺯ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ ﺍﻧ‰ﻌ‰ﻄ‰ﺎﻑﭘ‰ﺬﯾ‰ﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺑ‰ﺮﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭﯼ ﺗ‰ﻮﺍﺯﻥ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﭼﯿﺪﻥ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪ hδi ،hlengthi‬ﻭ ‪ hεi‬ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ ﻋﺪﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺣﺴﺐ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ‬ ‫ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ‪ hδi‬ﻭ ‪ hεi‬ﻣﺜﺒﺖ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻓﺮﺽ ﮐﻨﯿﻢ ‪ hlen-var i‬ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫}‪\setlength{hlen-var i}{hlengthi plus hεi minus hδi‬‬ ‫ﺳﺒﺐ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ hlengthi‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ‪ hlen-var i‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬ ‫ﻧﯿﺎﺯ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺑﺘﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ‪ hδi‬ﻓﺸﺮﺩﻩ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ‪ hεi‬ﻣﻨﺒﺴﻂ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ www.rasekhoon.net/software ۴۹ ‫ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬۶.۱ \sffamily \newlength{\mylength} \setlength{\mylength}{.1in plus 2mm minus 5pt} \addtolength{\mylength}{2ex} 7.22743pt plus 5.69054pt minus 5.0pt \the\mylength \hfill \the\mylength 16.11632pt plus 5.69054pt minus 5.0pt \fill ‫ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﺮ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ‬،LaTEX ‫ﯾ‰ﮑ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ ﺍﻧ‰ﻌ‰ﻄ‰ﺎﻑﭘ‰ﺬﯾ‰ﺮ ﭘ‰ﺮﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻭ ﭘ‰ﺮﺍﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﯿ‰ﺖ ﺩﺭ‬ .‫( ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‬۰, ∞) ‫ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺎﺯﻩﯼ‬.‫ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ A B C \par A B \hspace{\fill} C \par ABC A AB A A \hspace{\fill} B C \par A \hspace{\fill} B \hspace{\fill} C \par BC C C B ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ‬ ۸.۶.۱ LaTEX ‫ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ‬،‫ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺯﯾﺮ‬،‫ ﺑﭙﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ‬LaTEX ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﺁﺳﺎﻧﺘﺮ ﺑﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ ﻣﻔﻬﻮﻡ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ .‫ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﯿﺪ‬،‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ A box is any LATEX object that is treated as a unit (a single character). Characters, framed text , graphics such as A B rials such as are examples of boxes in LATEX. C D , and tabular mate- framed text ‫ ﺗ‰ﺼ‰ﻮ ﯾ‰ﺮ ﮔ‰ﺮﺍﻓ‰ﯿ‰ﮑ‰ﯽ ﻭ ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭﺕ ﻗ‰ﺎﺏﺩﺍﺭ‬،‫ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﭼ‰ﯿ‰ﺪﻥ ﺟ‰ﺪﻭﻝ‬LaTEX ،‫ﺩﺭ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ﺑ‰ﺎﻻ‬ .‫ ﻫﻤﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺭﻓﺘﺎﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬،‫ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ‬ LaTEX ‫ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﯾﺎ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﻧﺐ‬LaTEX ‫ ﺩﺭ‬۲۳ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‬ .‫ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‬.‫ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‬ 23 Box ‫‪۵۰‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۷.۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺗﺼﻮﺭ ﻇﺎﻫﺮﯼ ﻣﺎ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻠﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺿﻼﻉ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻮﺍﺯﯼ ﻣﺤﻮﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ width‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺴﺘﻄﯿﻞ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ totalheight‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪width‬‬ ‫‪height‬‬ ‫‪Reference‬‬ ‫‪Point‬‬ ‫‪totalheight‬‬ ‫‪depth‬‬ ‫‪Baseline‬‬ ‫ﻞ ‪ :۷.۱‬ﺷﮑﻞ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﯾﻦ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑ ِ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ‪۲۴‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻭ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ‬ ‫ﺳﺎﯾﺮ ﻧﻘﺎﻁ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻧﺴﺒﺖ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪ ﺳﻨﺠﯿﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺍﻟﯿﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻓﺮﺿﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺒﺪﺍٔ ﻣﺨﺘﺼﺎﺕ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺧﻂ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ‪۲۵‬‬ ‫ﺧﻄﯽ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻣﯽﮔﺬﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺑﺮ ﻣﺤﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝﻫﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪24 Reference point‬‬ ‫‪25 Baseline‬‬ ‫‪۵۱‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺎ ﺳﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪:‬‬ ‫• ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ height‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪ height‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﺎ ﺑﺎﻻﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺳﻘﻒ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﻋﻤﻖ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ depth‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪ depth‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﺗﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﯾﯿﻦﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﮐﻒ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ width‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪ width‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫• ﺩﺭﺍﺯﺍﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﯾﺎ ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﮐﻞ ﺁﻥ ﮐﻪ ﺑﺎ ‪ totalheight‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ‪ totalheight‬ﺑﺮﺍﺑﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫‪totalheight = height + depth.‬‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﻣﯽﭼﯿﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻨﺎﺑﺮﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺑﺮ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ LaTEX .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻫﺮ ﺷﯽﺀ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﻠﻘﯽ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﯿﻦ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻋﻤﻞ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺩﻩﯼ ﻣﻬﻤﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺗﺼﻮﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﮔ‰ﺮﺍﻓ‰ﯿ‰ﮑ‰ﯽ ﺫﺧ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﻩ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻗ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﺐ‬ ‫‪۲۶ ،EPS‬‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﻨ‰ﻄ‰ﺒ‰ﻖ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﮔ‰ﻮﺷ‰ﻪﯼ ﭘ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ ﺳ‰ﻤ‰ﺖ ﭼ‰ﭗ ﺁﻥ ﺗ‰ﺼ‰ﻮ ﯾ‰ﺮ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪﻥ ﺗﺼﺎﻭﯾﺮ ﮔﺮﺍﻓﯿﮑﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺩﺭ ﻓﺼﻞ ‪ ۶‬ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺢ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺭﺩﻩﺍﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ tabular‬ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۶.۲‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﯾﺪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ﺭﺳﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ tabular‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺟ‰ﻌ‰ﺒ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺍﻧ‰ﻮﺍﻉ ﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﺎ ﮔ‰ﻮﻥ ﺩﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﯼ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺳ‰ﻪ ﻧ‰ﻮﻉ ﻣ‰ﻬ‰ﻢ ﺁﻥ ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭﺕ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫‪ (۱‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ‪ (۲ ،LR‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﻭ ‪ (۳‬ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ ،Rule‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﺩﺍﻣﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺗﺸﺮﯾﺢ‬ ‫‪26 Encapsulated PostScript‬‬ ‫‪۵۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ‪.LR‬‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﺍﺯ ﭼﭗ ﺑﻪ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ‪ ۲۷‬ﭼﯿﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ ‪LR‬‬ ‫ﻓﻘﻂ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﮔﻨﺠﺎﻧﺪ ﻫﺮ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺑﻠﻨﺪ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪ htext i‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ ‪ LR‬ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﺭ ﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\mbox{htext i‬‬ ‫}‪\fbox{htext i‬‬ ‫}‪\makebox[hwidthi]{htext i‬‬ ‫}‪\framebox[hwidthi]{htext i‬‬ ‫}‪\makebox[htext-positioni][hwidthi]{htext i‬‬ ‫}‪\framebox[htext-positioni][hwidthi]{htext i‬‬ ‫ﻫﺮ ﺩﻭ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \mbox‬ﻭ ‪ \fbox‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ ‪ LR‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻝ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﻗﯿﻖﺗﺮ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﺩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ،۷.۱‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﻭ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺷﯽﺀ‬ ‫ﻭﺍﺣﺪﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺨﺶ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪ ،‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﺑﻠﻨﺪﺗﺮ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻧﻔﻮﺫ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪For instance, \fbox{some words} gives‬‬ ‫‪some words whereas \mbox will do the‬‬ ‫‪same thing, but without the ruled frame around‬‬ ‫‪the text.‬‬ ‫‪For instance,‬‬ ‫‪\verb|\fbox{some words}| gives‬‬ ‫‪\fbox{some words} whereas‬‬ ‫‪\verb|\mbox| will do the‬‬ ‫‪\mbox{same thing, but without‬‬ ‫‪the ruled frame around} the text.‬‬ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺗﻔﺎﻭﺕ ‪ \mbox‬ﻭ ‪ \fbox‬ﺩﺭ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﻗﺎﺑﯽ ﺍﻃﺮﺍﻑ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪htext i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﺠﺎ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ‬ ‫‪some thing, but without the ruled frame around‬‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﻭﺍﺣﺪ ﻣﺤﺴﻮﺏ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﺭﯼ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺿﺎﻓﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﺷﯿﻪ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪27 Left-to-Right‬‬ ‫‪۵۳‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﮐ‰ﺎﺭﮐ‰ﺮﺩ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ‪ \makebox‬ﻭ ‪ ،\framebox‬ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺗ‰ﺮﺗ‰ﯿ‰ﺐ‪ ،‬ﺷ‰ﺒ‰ﯿ‰ﻪ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ‪ \mbox‬ﻭ ‪\fbox‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺎ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺗ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﻭﺕ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻣ‰ﯽﺗ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﺪ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﮔ‰ﺰ ﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﻪﯼ ﺍﺧ‰ﺘ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺭﯼ ‪ hwidthi‬ﮐ‰ﻪ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻣ‰ﻘ‰ﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﻋﺪﺩﯼ ﺑﺮ ﺣﺴﺐ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣﺪﻫﺎﯼ ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﻗﺒﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ hwidthi‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ ،htext i‬ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﻓﻀﺎﯾﯽ ﮐﻪ ‪ htext i‬ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﻣﯽﻣﺎﻧﺪ‪ .‬ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ‪ hwidthi‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ‬ ‫ﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﮐﻤﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻗﺴﻤﺘﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﯼ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻭﺍﻗﻌﯽ ﻣﺘ ِ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﺩﻭ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫﺪ!‬ ‫}‪\framebox[5cm]{A few words of advice} \framebox{A few words of advice‬‬ ‫}‪\framebox[2cm]{A few words of advice‬‬ ‫‪A few words of advice‬‬ ‫‪A few words of advice‬‬ ‫‪A few words of advice‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑ‰‰ﻼﺧ‰‰ﺮﻩ ﺑ‰‰ﺎ ﺍﻋ‰‰ﻤ‰‰ﺎﻝ ﮔ‰‰ﺰﯾ‰‰ﻨ‰‰ﻪﯼ ﺍﺧ‰‰ﺘ‰‰ﯿ‰‰ﺎﺭﯼ ‪ ،htext-positioni‬ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰‰ﺮﻣ‰‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰‰ﺎﯼ ‪ \makebox‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ ،\framebox‬ﻣ‰ﯽﺗ‰ﻮﺍﻥ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﻞ ﺟ‰ﺎﯼﮔ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﯼ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﺟ‰ﻌ‰ﺒ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ LR‬ﺭﺍ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﯿ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔ‰ﺰ ﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﻪﯼ‬ ‫‪ htext-positioni‬ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ }‪ {l, c, r, s‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [l‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺍﻟﯿﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [c‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﻭﺳﻂ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [r‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺍﻟﯿﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﺭﺍﺳﺖ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﺍﻧﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [s‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﮐﺸﯿﺪﻩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺗﺎ ﺍﻧﺘﻬﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺍﺷﻐﺎﻝ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﻃﺒﯿﻌﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﺯﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ‪،hwidthi‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻦ ‪ htext i‬ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۵۴‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫]‪\\[1ex‬‬ ‫]‪\\[1ex‬‬ ‫]‪\\[1ex‬‬ ‫\\‬ ‫}‪of advice‬‬ ‫}‪advice‬‬ ‫}‪of advice‬‬ ‫}‪of advice‬‬ ‫‪\centering\fboxsep3pt‬‬ ‫‪\framebox[.95\textwidth][l]{A few word‬‬ ‫‪\framebox[.95\textwidth]{A few word of‬‬ ‫‪\framebox[.95\textwidth][r]{A few word‬‬ ‫‪\framebox[.95\textwidth][s]{A few word‬‬ ‫‪A few word of advice‬‬ ‫‪A few word of advice‬‬ ‫‪A few word of advice‬‬ ‫‪of‬‬ ‫‪advice‬‬ ‫‪word‬‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ ‪ \fboxrule‬ﻭ ‪.\fboxsep‬‬ ‫‪few‬‬ ‫‪A‬‬ ‫ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻥﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﻥ ﺷ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﻭ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ \fbox‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ \framebox‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻗﺎﺑﯽ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ ‪ LR‬ﺭﺍ ﻓﺮﺍﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﺎﺏ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻐﯿﺮ‬ ‫ﻃﻮﻟﯽ ‪ \fboxrule‬ﻧﮕﻬﺪﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ .4pt‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻭ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻗ‰ﺎﺏ ﺗ‰ﺎ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﺘ‰ﻮﯾ‰ﺎﺕ ﺟ‰ﻌ‰ﺒ‰ﻪ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺩﺭ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻐ‰ﯿ‰ﺮ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ ‪ \fboxsep‬ﺫﺧ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﻣﻘﺪﺍﺭ ﺁﻥ ‪ 3pt‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۶.۶.۱‬ﻣﻼﺣﻈﻪ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻘﺎﺩﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ‪ \setlength‬ﻭ ‪ \addtolength‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ {‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﺘﻪﺍﯾﻢ‪.‬‬ ‫}}‪{\setlength\fboxrule{2pt} \setlength\fboxsep{4pt} \fbox{some word‬‬ ‫}}‪{\setlength\fboxrule{.5pt} \setlength\fboxsep{2pt} \fbox{some word‬‬ ‫‪some word‬‬ ‫ﺟ‰ﻌ‰ﺒ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﭘ‰ﺎﺭﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮﺍﻓ‰ﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫‪some word‬‬ ‫ﯾ‰ﮏ ﺟ‰ﻌ‰ﺒ‰ﻪﯼ ﭘ‰ﺎﺭﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮﺍﻓ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﭘ‰ﻬ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﯼ ‪ hwidthi‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗ‰ﻊ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﭘ‰ﺎﺭﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮﺍﻑ ﺑ‰ﺎ‬ ‫ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ‪ hwidthi‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺩﺭ ﭼﻨﺪ ﺧﻂ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺴﺘﻪ ﺑﻪ ﺣﺠﻢ ﻣﺤﺘﻮﯾﺎﺕ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺭ ﻭﺵ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ؛ ﺭ ﻭﺵ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \parbox‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪۵۵‬‬ ‫‪ ۶.۱‬ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺳﺎﺳﯽ‬ ‫}‪\parbox[hbase-point-positioni]{hwidthi}{htext i‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺭ ﻭﺵ ﺩﻭﻡ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ minipage‬ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\begib{minipage}[hbase-point-positioni]{hwidthi‬‬ ‫‪htext i‬‬ ‫}‪\end{minipage‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﻫ‰ﺮﺩﻭ ﻣ‰ﻮﺭﺩ ‪ hwidthi‬ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻣ‰ﻘ‰ﺪﺍﺭ ﻋ‰ﺪﺩﯼ ﺑ‰ﺮﺣ‰ﺴ‰ﺐ ﯾ‰ﮑ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻭﺍﺣ‰ﺪﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻃ‰ﻮﻟ‰ﯽ ﻗ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﻞ ﻗ‰ﺒ‰ﻮﻝ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺸﺨﺺﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ‪hbase-point-positioni‬‬ ‫ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ‪hbase-point-positioni‬‬ ‫ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻑ }‪ {t, c, b‬ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [t‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻟﯿﻦ ﺷﯽﺀ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ‬ ‫ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [c‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﻋﻤﻮﺩﯼ ﻭﺳﻂ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﯽﺩﺍﻧﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻟﺤﺎﻅ ﺍﻓﻘﯽ ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﻫﺮ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺮ ﻣﻨﺘﻬﺎﺍﻟﯿﻪ ﺳﻤﺖ ﭼﭗ ﺁﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪ [b‬ﺑ‰ﺎﻋ‰ﺚ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ ﻧ‰ﻘ‰ﻄ‰ﻪﯼ ﭘ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻪﯼ ﺟ‰ﻌ‰ﺒ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﺮ ﻧ‰ﻘ‰ﻄ‰ﻪﯼ ﭘ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻪﯼ ﺁﺧ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻦ ﺷ‰ﯽﺀ ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭ ﮔ‰ﺮﻓ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟ‰ﻌ‰ﺒ‰ﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﻮﺟﻪ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ]‪ [t‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺮ ﺳﻘﻒِ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ ،‬ﻫﻤﺎﻥﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ]‪ [b‬ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻧﻤﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺧﻂ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺑﺮ ﮐﻒِ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻨﻄﺒﻖ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ‪ ،‬ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﻓﻘﻂ ﺷﺎﻣﻞ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﻫﺮ ﺳﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ]‪ [c] ،[b‬ﻭ ]‪ [t‬ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪﯼ ﯾﮑﺴﺎﻥ‬ ‫ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۸.۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩﻫﺎﯼ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ minipage‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۶.۶‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۳۵۲‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪.Rule‬‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ Rule‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺧﻄﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺴﺘﮕﯽ ﺑﻪ ﺍﺑﻌﺎﺩ‬ ‫ﺟ‰ﻌ‰ﺒ‰ﻪ‪ ،‬ﻣ‰ﻤ‰ﮑ‰ﻦ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺿ‰ﺨ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ ﯾ‰ﺎ ﻧ‰ﺎﺯﮎ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻠ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﯾ‰ﺎ ﮐ‰ﻮﺗ‰ﺎﻩ ﺑ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻧ‰ﻮﻉ ﺟ‰ﻌ‰ﺒ‰ﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﮐ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ‬ ۵۶ ‫ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬.۱‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬ \parbox{.35\textwidth}{This is the contents of the left-most parbox.} \hrulefill\ Current Line \hrulefill\ \parbox{.35\textwidth}{This is the right-most parbox. Note that the typeset text looks sloppy because \LaTeX{} cannot nicely balance the material in these narrow columns.} \begin{minipage}[b]{.3\linewidth} The \verb|minipage| environment creates a vertical box like the \verb|parbox| command. The bottom line of this \verb|minipage| is aligned with the \end{minipage} \hrulefill\ \begin{minipage}[c]{.3\linewidth} middle of this narrow \verb|parbox|, which in turn is \end{minipage} \hrulefill\ \begin{minipage}[t]{.3\linewidth} the top line of the right hand {\tt minipage}. It is recommended that the user experiment with the positioning arguments to get used to their effects. \end{minipage} This is the contents of the leftmost parbox. The minipage environment creates a vertical box like the parbox command. The bottom line of this minipage is aligned with the Current Line middle of this narrow parbox, which in turn is This is the right-most parbox. Note that the typeset text looks sloppy because LATEX cannot nicely balance the material in these narrow columns. the top line of the right hand minipage. It is recommended that the user experiment with the positioning arguments to get used to their effects. LaTEX ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺩﺭ‬:۸.۱ ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﺷﮑ‬ ‫‪۵۷‬‬ ‫‪ ۷.۱‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪ ،\rule‬ﺑﺎ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺯﯾﺮ‪ ،‬ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\rule[hlifti]{hwidthi}{htotalheight i‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ‪ hwidthi‬ﭘﻬﻨﺎﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ] = ﻃﻮﻝ ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺧﻂ [ ﻭ ‪ htotalheight i‬ﺍﺭﺗﻔﺎﻉ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ] = ﺿﺨﺎﻣﺖ‬ ‫ﭘﺎﺭﻩﺧﻂ [ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭﯼ ‪ hlift i‬ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﯼ ﮐﻒ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺗﺎ ﺧﻂ ﺯﻣﯿﻨﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻧﺤﻮﯼ ﻣﺸﺨﺺﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﻮﻗﻌﯿﺖ ﻧﻘﻄﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﯾﻪﯼ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻫﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫]‪\rule{\linewidth}{1pt} \\[2ex‬‬ ‫‪text \rule{1.5cm}{1pt} text \rule{1cm}{2mm} text \rule{5mm}{1cm} text‬‬ ‫}‪\rule[4mm]{1cm}{8mm} text \rule[-4mm]{1cm}{8mm} text \rule[-8mm]{1cm}{8mm‬‬ ‫‪text‬‬ ‫‪۹.۶.۱‬‬ ‫‪text‬‬ ‫‪text‬‬ ‫‪text‬‬ ‫‪text‬‬ ‫‪text‬‬ ‫ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ،۹.۱‬ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﯼ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻓﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‬ ‫ﯾﮏ ﺟﻌﺒﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ‪ LR‬ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۷.۱‬‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞِ ﻇ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﺮﯼ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻑ ﻭ ﻋ‰ﻼﯾ‰ﻢ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻭ ﻫ‰ﺮ ﺳ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﯼ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﺩﯾ‰ﮕ‰ﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧ‰ﺮ ﻭﺟ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧﺎﺷﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﻣٔﻮﻟﻔﻪﯼ ﺷﮑﻞِ‬ ‫ﺗ‰ٔﺎﮐ‰ﯿ‰ﺪ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞ ﺧ‰ﻮﺍﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﺪﻩ‪ ،italic ،‬ﻣ‰ﯽﻧ‰ﻮ ﯾ‰ﺴ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺎﺏ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﻧ‰ﺸ‰ﺎﻥ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ‪۲۸‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ‪۲۹‬‬ ‫ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫‪28 Font shape‬‬ ‫‪29 Font size‬‬ ۵۸ ‫ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬.۱‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬ \centering \fboxrule2pt\fboxsep2pt\fbox{\fboxrule.5pt\fboxsep3mm\fbox{% \begin{minipage}{.9\linewidth} The box commands described above may be nested to any desired level. Including an LR-box within a paragraph-box or a \texttt{minipage} causes no obvious conceptual difficulties. The opposite, a paragraph-box within an LR-box, is also possible, and is easy to visualize if one keeps in mind that every box is a unit, treated by \LaTeX{} as a single character of the corresponding size \end{minipage}}} The box commands described above may be nested to any desired level. Including an LR-box within a paragraph-box or a minipage causes no obvious conceptual difficulties. The opposite, a paragraph-box within an LR-box, is also possible, and is easy to visualize if one keeps in mind that every box is a unit, treated by LATEX as a single character of the corresponding size ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺟﻌﺒﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ‬:۹.۱ ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﺷﮑ‬ ‫ ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻥﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞ ﻗ‰ﻠ‰ﻢ ﺭﺍ‬.‫ ﺳ‰ﻮﺩ ﺟ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﺍﯾ‰ﻢ‬typewriter ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞ ﻗ‰ﻠ‰ﻢ‬،‫ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﺘ‰ﻮ ﯾ‰ﺎﺕ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‬ :‫ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﻧﯿﺰ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺩﺍﺩ‬،‫ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻮﺽ ﮐﺮﺩ‬ We can also produce smaller and bigger type. ‫ﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ِ ‫ﺷﮑ‬ ۱.۷.۱ ‫ﻝ‬ ِ ‫ ﺟ‰ﺪﻭ‬.‫ ﺗ‰ﻌ‰ﯿ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‬Family ‫ ﻭ‬Series ،Shape ‫ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞ ﻗ‰ﻠ‰ﻢ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﺳ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﺨ‰ﺼ‰ﻪﯼ‬LaTEX ‫ﺩﺭ‬ ،‫ ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺮﺍﻩ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﻇ‰ﺮ‬،‫ ﺩﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻧ‰ﺘ‰ﺨ‰ﺎﺏﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻣ‰ﺨ‰ﺘ‰ﻠ‰ﻒ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﺨ‰ﺼ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎ‬۵.۱ ‫\ ﻣﻮﺟﺐ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺎ‬textit{\textbf{Some text}} ‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬،‫ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬ ‫ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﯼ‬ Shape=Italic, Series=Boldface, Family=Roman .‫ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‬Some text ‫ ﮐﻪ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ‬،‫ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬Some text ‫ﻦ‬ ِ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘ‬ www.rasekhoon.net/software ۵۹ ‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ‬۷.۱ Shape Series Family Font styles Declaration Command upright shape {\upshape htext i} \textup{htext i} italic shape {\itshape htext i} \textit{htext i} Slanted shape {\slshape htext i} \textsl{htext i} Small Caps shape {\scshape htext i} \textsc{htext i} Medium series {\mdseries htext i} \textmd{htext i} Boldface series {\bfseries htext i} \textbf{htext i} Roman family {\rmfamily htext i} \textrm{htext i} Sans serif family {\sffamily htext i} \textsf{htext i} Typewrite family {\ttfamily htext i} \texttt{htext i} ‫ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺗﻌﯿﯿﻦِ ﺷﮑﻞِ ﻗﻠﻢ‬:۵.۱ ‫ﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺟﺪﻭ‬ Series=Medium ،Shape=Upright ‫ ﺩﺍﺭﺍﯼ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﯼ‬،‫ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻌﻤﻮﻟﯽ‬،‫ﻗﻠﻢ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ‬ ِ .‫ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺗﺮﮐﯿﺒﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﺭﺍ ﻧﺸﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‬.‫ ﺍﺳﺖ‬Family=Roman ‫ﻭ‬ \textsf{\textbf{Sans Serif family, Boldface Series, Upright Shape.}} \\[.5ex] \textbf{\slshape Roman family, Boldface Series, Slanted shape.} \\[.5ex] {\scshape \ttfamily Typewriter family, Medium series, Small Caps shape.} Sans Serif family, Boldface Series, Upright Shape. Roman family, Boldface Series, Slanted shape. Typewriter family, Medium series, Small Caps shape. ‫ﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺭﺍ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ‬ ِ ‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭ‬ ِ ‫ ﺑﻪ ﺩﻭ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﯼ ﺷﮑ‬،‫ ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬۵.۱ ‫ﻝ‬ :‫ﺩﺍﺩ‬ ،\textbf{htext i} ‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬،‫‐ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬۱ ‫ ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬،‫ﻦ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ِ ‫‐ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻧﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿﺖ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘ‬۲ .{\bfseries htext i} ‫ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬،‫ ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥِ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‬،‫ﺑﺎﯾﺪ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﺮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺩﻭﻡ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺍﻭﻻً ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺛﺎﻧﯿﺎً ﺑﺎ ﺁﻥ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ‬ ‫‪۶۰‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺟﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺁﻧﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ؛ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۸.۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۱۰.۱‬ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﭼﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻣﺸﺨﺼﻪﯼ‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ \bfseries‬ﺑﺮ ﺳﻪ ﺳﻄﺮ ﺁﺧﺮ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫\\‬ ‫\\‬ ‫]‪\\[1ex‬‬ ‫\\‬ ‫\\‬ ‫‪\textbf{triangle}, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫‪{\bfseries triangle}, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫‪\bfseries triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫‪\textit{triangle}, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫‪{\itshape triangle}, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫‪\itshape triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪a‬‬ ‫‪By‬‬ ‫‪By‬‬ ‫‪By‬‬ ‫‪By‬‬ ‫‪By‬‬ ‫‪By‬‬ ‫‪By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫‪By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫‪By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫‪By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫‪By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫‪By a triangle, we mean a polygon of three sides.‬‬ ‫ﻞ ‪ :۱۰.۱‬ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫ﺷﮑ ِ‬ ‫ﻝ ‪ ۵.۱‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭ ِ‬ ‫ﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﯾﺎ‬ ‫ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻄﻠﺐ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝِ ﺷﮑ ِ‬ ‫ﭼﻨﺪ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺩ ﺟﺴﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻋﻤﺎﻝ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿﺖ ‪Sans Serif‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ sffamily‬ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ؛ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۱۱.۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻂ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺭﺍﯾ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﯼ ﻭﯼ ﻣ‰ﻮﺟ‰ﻮﺩ ﻧ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ‪ LaTEX ،‬ﯾ‰ﮏ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﻐ‰ﺎﻡ ﻫ‰ﺸ‰ﺪﺍﺭ‬ ‫ﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﻗ‰ﻠ‰ﻢ ﺑ‰ﮑ‰ﺎﺭ ﺭﻓ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺩﻫﻨﺪﻩ ‪۳۰‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻩ ﻧﺰﺩﯾﮏﺗﺮﯾﻦ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﻮﺟﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺰﯾﻦ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﺶ ‪ ۲.۳.۱‬ﺁﻣﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺑﺮ ﺭﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﮐﻨﻮﻥ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \emph‬ﺭﺍ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝِ ﺑﺨ ِ‬ ‫ﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ Shape=Upright‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪\emph{htext i‬‬ ‫ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﻣﺸﺎﻫﺪﻩ ﮐﺮﺩﯾﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ ﺑﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿ ِ‬ ‫ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿﺖ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ‪ htext i‬ﺑﻪ ‪ Shape=Italic‬ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺍﮔﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺘﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺧﺼﻮﺻﯿ ﺖِ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ Shape=Italic‬ﯾﺎ ‪ Shape=Slanted‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ \emph{htext i‬ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺣﺎﺻﻞ‬ ‫‪30 Warning‬‬ ۶۱ ‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ‬۷.۱ These declaration names can also be used as environment names:% \begin{sffamily} Thus to typeset a long passage in, say, \verb|sans serif| family, just enclose the passage within the commands \verb|\begin{sffamily} ... \end{sffamily}|. \end{sffamily} These declaration names can also be used as environment names: Thus to typeset a long passage in, say, sans serif family, just enclose the passage within the commands \begin{sffamily} ... \end{sffamily}. .‫ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﺩ‬:۱۱.۱ ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﺷﮑ‬ .‫ ﭘﺎﺳﺦ ﺍﯾﻦ ﭘﺮﺳﺶ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪﺧﻮﺑﯽ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‬۱۲.۱ ‫ﭼﯿﺴﺖ؟ ﺷﮑﻞ‬ A polygon \textit{A \textsl{A \textbf{A \textsc{A of three sides is called a \emph{triangle}. \\ polygon of three sides is called a \emph{triangle}.} \\ polygon of three sides is called a \emph{triangle}.} \\ polygon of three sides is called a \emph{triangle}.} \\ polygon of three sides is called a \emph{triangle}.} A polygon of three sides is called a triangle. A polygon of three sides is called a triangle. A polygon of three sides is called a triangle. A polygon of three sides is called a triangle. A polygon of three sides is called a triangle. \emph ‫ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﻋﻤﻠﮑﺮﺩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬:۱۲.۱ ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﺷﮑ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ۲.۷.۱ ‫ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻋ‰ﻼﻣ‰ﺖ‬،point ‫ ﺍﻧ‰ﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗ‰ﻠ‰ﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺳ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﺮﺣ‰ﺴ‰ﺐ ﻭﺍﺣ‰ﺪ‬،‫ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻌ‰ﺎﺭﻑ‬ ‫ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ‬10pt ‫ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ‬LaTEX ،‫ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ‬.‫ ﺑﯿﺎﻥ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‬،pt ‫ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﯼ‬ ۶.۱ ‫ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ‬LaTEX ‫ﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ‬ ِ ‫ ﺩﻩ ﻓﺮﻣﺎ‬.‫ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﺩ‬ ‫‪۶۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﮔ‰ﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ ،\normalsize‬ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻥﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻧ‰ﺎﻡ ﺁﻥ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺪﺍ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋ‰ﻼﻥﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﻩﯼ‬ ‫ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠ ﻢ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ \tiny .‬ﮐﻮﭼﮑﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩ ﻭ ‪ \Huge‬ﺑﺰ ﺭﮔﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪example‬‬ ‫‪declaration‬‬ ‫‪\tiny‬‬ ‫‪\scriptsize‬‬ ‫‪\footnotesize‬‬ ‫‪\small‬‬ ‫‪The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog‬‬ ‫‪\normalsize‬‬ ‫‪The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog‬‬ ‫‪\large‬‬ ‫‪The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy‬‬ ‫‪\Large‬‬ ‫‪The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The‬‬ ‫‪\LARGE‬‬ ‫‪The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over‬‬ ‫‪\huge‬‬ ‫‪The Quick Brown Fox Jumps‬‬ ‫‪\Huge‬‬ ‫‪The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog‬‬ ‫‪The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog‬‬ ‫‪The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog‬‬ ‫‪The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog‬‬ ‫ﻝ ‪ :۶.۱‬ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ‪LaTEX‬‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭ ِ‬ ‫ﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝِ ‪ ،۵.۱‬ﻫﻤﮕﯽ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺧﻼ ِ‬ ‫ﻑ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑ ِ‬ ‫ﻗ‰ﻠ‰ﻢ ﺍﺯ ﻧ‰ﻮﻉ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﺍﻋ‰ﻼﻥﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﻭ ﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺑ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺪ ﺍﺯ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﻭﻩﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﯼ ﻣ‰ﻨ‰ﺎﺳ‰ﺐ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﺎﻡ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﻧﯿﺰ ﺑﮑﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﺩ؛ ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۱۳.۱‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺐ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺠﻤﻮﻋﻪﯼ ﻭﺳﯿﻊ ﻭ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻧﯽ ﺍﺯ ﻧﻮﻉ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﺗﺮﮐﯿ ِ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻞ ‪ ۱۴.۱‬ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ‬ ‫ﯾﺎﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑ ِ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﮔﺬﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﻥ ﭼ‰ﻨ‰ﺪ ﻧ‰ﮑ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺑ‰ﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞ ‪ ۱۴.۱‬ﻣ‰ﻔ‰ﯿ‰ﺪ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻥﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﺪﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﯿﻦ }‪ \begin{center‬ﻭ }‪ \end{cener‬ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﺩﻗﯿﻘﺎً ﻭﺳﻂ ﺧﻂ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ﻭ ﺁﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ }‪ \begin{flushright‬ﻭ }‪ \end{flushright‬ﺟ‰ﺎﯼ ﮔ‰ﺮﻓ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺧ‰ﺮ ﻭﺟ‰ﯽ‬ ‫‪ ۷.۱‬ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ‬ ‫‪۶۳‬‬ ‫‪These declaration names can also be used as environment names:%‬‬ ‫}‪\begin{footnotesize‬‬ ‫‪Thus to typeset a long passage in, say, \verb|footnotesize| size,‬‬ ‫‪just enclose the passage within the‬‬ ‫‪commands‬‬ ‫‪\verb|\begin{footnotesize} ... \end{footnotesize}|.‬‬ ‫}‪\end{footnotesize‬‬ ‫‪These declaration names can also be used as environment names: Thus to type‬‬‫‪set a long passage in, say, footnotesize size, just enclose the passage within the commands‬‬ ‫‪\begin{footnotesize} ... \end{footnotesize}.‬‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞِ ‪ :۱۳.۱‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩﯼ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻧﺪ ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭ ﺭ ﻭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻪ ﺣ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﻪﯼ ﺳ‰ﻤ‰ﺖِ ﺭﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺭﺍﻧ‰ﺪﻩ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﺎﺑ‰ﻪ ﺍﺯ }‪\begin{flushleft‬‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﻨ‰ﺘ‰ﻬ‰ﺎﺍﻟ‰ﯿ‰ ِ‬ ‫ﻭ }‪ \end{flushleft‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺭﺍﻧ‰ﺪﻥ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺣ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﻪﯼ ﺳ‰ﻤ‰ﺖِ ﭼ‰ﭗ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦﺑ‰ﺎﺭﻩ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﯼ ‪ ۱.۴.۲‬ﻭ ‪ ۲.۴.۲‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۳.۷.۱‬‬ ‫ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ Times‬ﻭ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﭘﯿﺶﻓﺮﺽ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ ،Computer Modern‬ﺑﺎ ﻧﻤﺎﺩ ﺍﺧﺘﺼﺎﺭﯼ ‪ ،CM‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﻣﺘﻦ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻗﻠﻢ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﺩﻭﻧﺎﻟﺪ ﮐﻨﻮﺙ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺩﺭ ‪ TEX‬ﻃﺮﺍﺣﯽ ﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ‪TEX‬‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﻫﺪﻑ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﮐﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎ ﭘﺪﯾﺪ ﺁﻣﺪ ﻭ ‪ Computer Modern‬ﻗﻠﻤﯽ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﺘﺎﺏﻫﺎ ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ‪ .‬ﺍﻣﺎ ‪ Computer Modern‬ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﻗﻠﻤﯽ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ۷.۱‬ﺩﺭﺑﺮﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪﻩﯼ ﮔﺮﺩﺍﯾﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺭﺍﯾﮕﺎﻥ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﮐ‰ﺎﺭﺑ‰ﺮ ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﻋ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻝ ﺑ‰ﺮﺧ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻗ‰ﻠ‰ﻢﻫ‰ﺎ ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﯽ ﻓ‰ﺮﺍﻫ‰ﻢ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﻣ‰ﺜ‰ﺎﻝ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠ ﻢ ‪ Times New Roman‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪ times‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﻬﺮﻩﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻠﻢ ‪ Pandora‬ﮐﺎﻓﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺴﺘﻪﯼ ‪ pandora‬ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻓﺮﺍﺧﻮﺍﻧﯽ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎﯼ ‪ ۱۵.۱‬ﻭ ‪ ۱۶.۱‬ﺭﺍ ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻝ‪ ۷.۱‬ﺩﺳﺖ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﮐﻠﯽ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭ ِ‬ ‫ﺑﺎ ﮐﻤﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ‪ \fontfamily‬ﻭ ‪ \selectfont‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ۶۴ ‫ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬.۱‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬ \begin{center} {\bfseries \huge The \TeX nical Institute}\\[.75cm] {\scshape\LARGE Certificate} \end{center} \noindent This is to certify that Mr.~N.~O.~Vice has undergone a course at this institute and is qualified to be a \TeX nician. \begin{flushright} \sffamily The Director\\ The \TeX nical Institute \end{flushright} The TEXnical Institute Certificate This is to certify that Mr. N. O. Vice has undergone a course at this institute and is qualified to be a TEXnician. The Director The TEXnical Institute ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺟﺎﯾﮕﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﺘﻦ ﻫﻤﺮﺍﻩ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺍﻧﻮﺍﻉ ﻣﺨﺘﻠﻒ ﻗﻠﻢ‬:۱۴.۱ ِ‫ﺷﮑﻞ‬ ۶۵ ‫ ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻗﻠﻢ‬۷.۱ font name font family Computer Modern Roman cmr The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog Computer Modern Sans cmss The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog Computer Modern Typewriter cmtt The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog Pandora panr Pandora Sans pss !" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*: Pandora Typewriter pntt !" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*: Universal uni ! " #$ % ' () * + , -* . /$ 0 1 2 34 " ) Concrete ccr ccr Avant Grade pag avant The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog Bookman pbk bookman The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog Courier pcr courier The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The ... Helvetica phv helvet The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog New Century Schoolbook pnc newcent The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog Palatino ppl palatino The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog Times New Roman ptm times The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog Zapf Chancery pzc zapfchan The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog Charter bch charter The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog URW Antiqua uaq The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog URW Grotesk ugq The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog Utopia put package pandora utopia example !" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*: !" 5 5 5 !" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*: The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog LaTEX ‫ ﺑﺮﺧﯽ ﻗﻠﻢﻫﺎﯼ ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﺩﺭ‬:۷.۱ ‫ﻝ‬ ِ ‫ﺟﺪﻭ‬ www.rasekhoon.net/software ۶۶ ‫ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬.۱‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬ % in preamble: \usepackage{times} The Quick Brown Fox Jumps \textit{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps \textsl{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps \textsc{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps \textbf{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps \texttt{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps \textsf{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over Over Over Over Over Over Over The The The The The The The Lazy Lazy Lazy Lazy Lazy Lazy Lazy Dog. Dog.} Dog.} Dog.} Dog.} Dog.} Dog.} \\[.5ex] \\[.5ex] \\[.5ex] \\[1ex] \\[1ex] \\[.5ex] The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog. The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog. The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog. T HE Q UICK B ROWN F OX J UMPS OVER T HE L AZY D OG . The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog. The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog. The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog. Times ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ‬:۱۵.۱ ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﺷﮑ‬ ِ % in preamble: \usepackage{bookman} The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over \textit{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over \textsl{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over \textsc{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over \textbf{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over \texttt{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over \textsf{The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The The The The The The The Lazy Lazy Lazy Lazy Lazy Lazy Lazy Dog. Dog.} Dog.} Dog.} Dog.} Dog.} Dog.} \\[.5ex] \\[.5ex] \\[.5ex] \\[1ex] \\[1ex] \\[.5ex] !" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:; !" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:; !" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:; ! # "#$% ( &'() - '* / "+,- 3 .!& ! 5 /01 9 '2 ; !" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:; The Quick Brown Fox Jumps Over The Lazy Dog. !" #$% ' ()*+, -*. /$012 34") !" 5678 9*:; Bookman ‫ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺑﻪﮐﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ‬:۱۶.۱ ِ‫ﺷﮑﻞ‬ ِ ‫‪۶۷‬‬ ‫‪ ۸.۱‬ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫}‪{\fontfamily{hfont-familyi}\selectfont htext i‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻨﺠﺎ ‪ hfont-familyi‬ﻧﺎﻣﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻗﻠ ﻢ ﻣﻮﺭﺩ ﻧﻈﺮ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ۷.۱‬ﺯﯾﺮ ﺳﺘﻮﻥ ‪font‬‬ ‫ِ‬ ‫‪ family‬ﺁﻣ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﺑ‰ﺨ‰ﻮﺍﻫ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ ﺍﻧ‰ﺘ‰ﺨ‰ﺎﺏ ﻗ‰ﻠ‰ﻢ ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﻣ‰ﻮﺿ‰ﻌ‰ﯽ ﺭﺥ ﺩﻫ‰ﺪ ﺑ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺪ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﻮﺭﺩ ﻧ‰ﻈ‰ﺮ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺬﮐﻮﺭ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﮔﯿﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۸.۱‬ﺭﺍ‬ ‫ﺑﺒﯿﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪{\fontfamily{phv} \selectfont Helvetica looks like this.} \hfill‬‬ ‫‪{\fontfamily{bch} \selectfont Charter looks like this.} \hfill‬‬ ‫}‪{\fontfamily{pag} \selectfont Avant Grade looks like this.‬‬ ‫‪!"#$ %&"'( )**+, )-+( $.-,/‬‬ ‫‪۸.۱‬‬ ‫‪Charter looks like this.‬‬ ‫‪Helvetica looks like this.‬‬ ‫ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭ ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻥﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺟ‰ﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ۱.۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺻ‰ﻔ‰ﺤ‰ﻪﯼ ‪ ۲۱‬ﻣ‰ﻼﺣ‰ﻈ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﮐ‰ﺮﺍ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺮﻫ‰ﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﺍﺯ ﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪﯼ‬ ‫ﮐ‰ﺮﺍ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺮﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻣ‰ﺨ‰ﺼ‰ﻮﺹ ﺑ‰ﻪﺣ‰ﺴ‰ﺎﺏ ﻣ‰ﯽﺁﯾ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﺎ ﮐ‰ﻤ‰ﯽ ﺩﻗ‰ﺖ ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻣ‰ﺸ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﺪﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ ﻫ‰ﺮﺟ‰ﺎ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﺍﯼ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ { ﺁﻏﺎﺯ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺍﻧﺪﮐﯽ ﺟﻠﻮﺗﺮ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ } ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﯾﺎﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬ ‫ﻫﻤﻮﺍﺭﻩ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ } ﻣﮑﻤﻞ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ { ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺟﺰ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ {\ ﯾﺎ }\ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺩﻭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﻧﻘﺶ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩﺳﺎﺯﯼ ﺧﻮﺩ ﺭﺍ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺖ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﻪﻋ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﺍﻥ ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧ‰ﺠ‰ﺎ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣ‰ﺜ‰ﻼً‪ ،‬ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ \LaTeXCommand‬ﻋ‰ﻤ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﺍﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺀ‬ ‫‪ hobjectsi‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﺩﻫﺪ‪ ،‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ؛ }‪.\LaTeXCommand{hobjectsi‬‬ ‫ﺍﻫﻤﯿﺖ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ‪ hobject i‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ } { ﺑﻪﻭﯾﮋﻩ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻣﯽ ﺧﻮﺩﻧﻤﺎﯾﯽ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺗﻌﺪﺍﺩ ﺍﯾﻦ‬ ‫ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺩﻭ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪first document.‬‬ ‫‪f irst document.‬‬ ‫‪f irst document.‬‬ ‫‪first document.‬‬ ‫‪my‬‬ ‫‪my‬‬ ‫‪my‬‬ ‫‪my‬‬ ‫‪is‬‬ ‫‪is‬‬ ‫‪is‬‬ ‫‪is‬‬ ‫‪This‬‬ ‫‪This‬‬ ‫‪This‬‬ ‫‪This‬‬ ‫\\‪\emph{first} document.‬‬ ‫\\ ‪\emph first document.‬‬ ‫\\‪\textbf first document.‬‬ ‫‪\textbf{first} document.‬‬ ‫‪my‬‬ ‫‪my‬‬ ‫‪my‬‬ ‫‪my‬‬ ‫‪is‬‬ ‫‪is‬‬ ‫‪is‬‬ ‫‪is‬‬ ‫‪This‬‬ ‫‪This‬‬ ‫‪This‬‬ ‫‪This‬‬ ‫‪۶۸‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎ‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﮔﻮﻧﻪﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﻏﺎﻟﺒﺎً ﺗٔﺎﺛﯿﺮ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻮﺿﻌﯽ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﺮﺑﻮﻁ ﺑﻪ ﺷﮑﻞ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻭ ﺍﻧﺪﺍﺯﻩﯼ ﻗﻠﻢ ﻣﯽﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ۵.۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۵۹‬ﻭ ﺩﺭ ﺟﺪﻭﻝ ‪ ۶.۱‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ،۶۲‬ﮔﺮﺩﺁﻭﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩﯼ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﺑﺨﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ‬ ‫ﺗﻨﻬﺎ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪﯼ ﻣﻌﯿﻦ ﻣﻌﺘﺒﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﻥ ﻧﺎﺣﯿﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺑﺎ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﺭﺍ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪This is my first document‬‬ ‫‪This is my first document‬‬ ‫‪This is my first document‬‬ ‫‪This is my {\itshape first} document‬‬ ‫\\ ‪This is my \itshape first document‬‬ ‫‪This is my {\large first} document‬‬ ‫ﻭ ﺑﺎﻻﺧﺮﻩ ﺑﻪ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮﺩ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﻣﯽﭘﺮﺩﺍﺯﯾﻢ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۴.۳‬ﺩﺭ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ ‪ ۱۵۵‬ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﻓﺮﻣﻮﻝﻧﻮﯾﺴﯽ ﺗﺸﺮﯾﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺣﺎﻝ ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﺑﺮ ﻧﺘﯿﺠﻪﯼ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺛﺮ ﻣﯽﮔﺬﺍﺭﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫[\‬ ‫‪a^bc,\quad a^{bc},\quad \frac123,\quad \frac1{23},\quad \frac{12}3,\quad‬‬ ‫‪\int_2\pi^3\pi f,\quad \int_{2\pi}^{3\pi} f,\quad‬‬ ‫)‪\lim_x\to\infty f(x),\quad \lim_{x\to\infty} f(x‬‬ ‫]\‬ ‫‪3π‬‬ ‫)‪lim f (x‬‬ ‫∞→‪x‬‬ ‫‪lim → ∞f (x),‬‬ ‫‪x‬‬ ‫‪f,‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫‪2π‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪π πf,‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪Z‬‬ ‫‪12‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪3‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪,‬‬ ‫‪23‬‬ ‫‪1‬‬ ‫‪3,‬‬ ‫‪2‬‬ ‫‪bc‬‬ ‫‪a ,‬‬ ‫‪b‬‬ ‫‪a c,‬‬ ‫ﯾﮑﯽ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﮐﻪ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﻩ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣﺤﯿﻂﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ .‬ﭼﻨﺎﻧﭽﻪ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﻥ ﺍﻋﻼﻥﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻄﯽ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ ،‬ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ﺑﯽﺍﺛﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺩﻗﺖ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎ ِ‬ ‫ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪۶۹‬‬ ‫‪ ۹.۱‬ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫‪Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual‬‬ ‫‪\begin{itshape}%‬‬ ‫‪under the conditions for \bfseries verbatim copying,‬‬ ‫‪\end{itshape}%‬‬ ‫‪provided that the entire resulting derived work is distributed‬‬ ‫‪under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one.‬‬ ‫‪Permission is granted to copy and distribute modified versions of this manual under‬‬ ‫‪the conditions for verbatim copying, provided that the entire resulting derived work‬‬ ‫‪is distributed under the terms of a permission notice identical to this one.‬‬ ‫ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍ ﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﻮﻥ ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭﺩﺍﺩ ﻣ‰ﯽﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ ﻣ‰ﻨ‰ﻈ‰ﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﯾ‰ﮏ‬ ‫ﮔ‰ﺮ ﻭﻩﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﯼ ‪۳۱‬‬ ‫ﯾ‰ﻌ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﮔ‰ﺮﺩﺍﯾ‰ﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺀ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﺪﻭﺩﻩﯼ ﺍﯾ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﺩ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ﮐ‰ﺮﺍ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺮﻫ‰ﺎﯼ } ﻭ { ﻭ ﯾ‰ﺎ ﺩﺭ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﺪﻭﺩﻩﯼ ﭘ‰ﺪﯾ‰ﺪ ﺁﻣ‰ﺪﻩ ﺑ‰ﻪﻭﺳ‰ﯿ‰ﻠ‰ﻪﯼ ﯾ‰ﮏ‬ ‫ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‪ ،‬ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﭼﻨﺪ ﻻﯾﻪﯼ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﯿﻢ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ‬ ‫}}}‪{A {B {C D‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺳﻪ ﻻﯾﻪ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻭﺟﻮﺩ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺧﺎﺭﺝ ﺑﻪ ﺩﺍﺧﻞ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ ‪A, B, C,‬‬ ‫‪ D‬ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﻭﻩﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﯼ ﻻﯾ‰ﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺀ ‪ B, C, D‬ﺩﺭ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﻭﻩﺑ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﯼ ﻻﯾ‰ﻪﯼ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻭ ﺍﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺀ ‪ C, D‬ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﮔﺮ ﻭﻩﺑﻨﺪﯼ ﻻﯾﻪﯼ ﺳﻮﻡ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﻧﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۹.۱‬‬ ‫ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫ﻻ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺗﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮑﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺭﺩﻩﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭﯼ ﻣﻘﺎﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥﻧﺎﻣﻪ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺟﺎﯼ ﻣﯽﮔﯿﺮﻧﺪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﻤﻮ ً‬ ‫ﻋ‰ﻤ‰ﻞ ﺍﺭﺟ‰ﺎﻉﺩﻫ‰ﯽ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﺰ ﻧ‰ﺎﭘ‰ﺬﯾ‰ﺮ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺟ‰ﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺧ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﻩ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻓ‰ﺼ‰ﻞ ﯾ‰ﺎ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﺑ‰ﺨ‰ﺶ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺫﮐﺮ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺩﻥ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺁﻥ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ‬ ‫ﺷﺪﻩ ﺳﭙﺲ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺫﮐﺮ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻧﻨﺪﻩ ﺭﺍ ﺑﻪ ﻣﻄﻠﺒﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﯾﮏ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﯼ‬ ‫ﻣﻌﯿﻦ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉ ﺩﺍﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺫﮐﺮ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﻣﺎ ﻓﺮﺍﯾﻨﺪ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭼﮕﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ؟ ﺁﯾﺎ ﻻﺯﻡ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﺎﺭﺑﺮ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺑﺨﺶ ﯾﺎ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ‬ ‫‪31 Grouping‬‬ ‫‪۷۰‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﯾ‰ﺎ ﺻ‰ﻔ‰ﺤ‰ﻪﯼ ﻣ‰ﻮﺭﺩ ﻧ‰ﻈ‰ﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺑ‰ﻪﺧ‰ﺎﻃ‰ﺮ ﺳ‰ﭙ‰ﺎﺭﺩ ﻭ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﻞ ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﻫ‰ﺪ؟ ﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦﮔ‰ﻮﻧ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ ﺁﻧ‰ﮕ‰ﺎﻩ‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺳﺨﺖ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﺪ ﺑﻮﺩ؛ ﺯﯾﺮﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻫﺮﺑﺎﺭ ﻭﯾﺮﺍﯾﺶ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ‪ ،‬ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻣﻄﺎﻟﺒﯽ ﺑﻪ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺿﺎﻓﻪ ﮔﺮﺩﺩ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﮐﺎﺳﺘﻪ ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﻋﻮﺍﻣﻞ ﺑﺎﻋﺚ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺗﺼﺤﯿﺢ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﺩﺳﺘﯽ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺎﺭ ﻃﻮﻻﻧﯽ‪ ،‬ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﯾﮏ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥﻧﺎﻣﻪ‪،‬‬ ‫ﮐﺎﺭﯼ ﻃﺎﻗﺖﻓﺮﺳﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺷﺒﺨﺘﺎﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﮐﺎﺭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﺴﯿﺎﺭ ﺁﺳﺎﻥ ﮔﺸﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﻗﺎﻋﺪﻩﯼ ﮐﻠﯽ ﺍﯾﻦﮔﻮﻧﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋﻢ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﻓﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﺑﺨﺶ‪ ،‬ﯾﮏ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪ ﯾﺎ ﯾﮏ‬ ‫ﻗ‰ﻀ‰ﯿ‰ﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻭﺳ‰ﯿ‰ﻠ‰ﻪﯼ ﯾ‰ﮏ‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﺮﭼ‰ﺴ‰ﺐ ‪۳۲‬‬ ‫ﻧ‰ﺸ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﮔ‰ﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺳ‰ﭙ‰ﺲ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﺟ‰ﺎﯼ ﺫﮐ‰ﺮ‬ ‫ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ ﺷ‰ﯽﺀ ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﻣ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﻘ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺑ‰ﺮﭼ‰ﺴ‰ﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﻧ‰ﮑ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﯼ ﻣ‰ﻬ‰ﻢ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‪ ،‬ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ‪ ،LaTEX‬ﻣﻨﺤﺼﺮﺍً‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺋﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﺧﻮﺩﮐﺎﺭ ﺗﻮﺳﻂ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺑﮑﺎﺭﮔﯿﺮﯼ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺋﯽ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪ ﮐﻤﮏ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ‪ ،‬ﻗﺎﺑﻞ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺳﻪ ﺩﺳﺘﻪ‬ ‫ﺗﻘﺴﯿﻢ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﻧﺪ‪:‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺋﯽ ﻧﻈﯿﺮ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﺟﺪﻭﻝﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ‪۳۳ ،‬‬ ‫ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﺣﺘﯽ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﯾﮏ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﺷﯽ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ ﺩﻭﻡ ﻫﻤﻪﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﺎﺕ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺩﺍﺭ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ ﺳﻮﻡ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﻣﺪﺧﻞﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ ﯾﺎ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﻨﺎﻣﻪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟ‰ﺎﻉﺩﻫ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺍﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﺎﺀ ﺩﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺟ‰ﺎﻉﺩﻫ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﺷ‰ﯽﺀ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺍﺑ‰ﺘ‰ﺪﺍ‬ ‫ﺁﻥ ﺷ‰ﯽﺀ ﺭﺍ ﺑ‰ﻪﻭﺳ‰ﯿ‰ﻠ‰ﻪﯼ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﺑ‰ﺮﭼ‰ﺴ‰ﺐ ﻧ‰ﺸ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﮔ‰ﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻣ‰ﯽﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﯿ‰ﻢ‪ .‬ﻋ‰ﻤ‰ﻞ ﻧ‰ﺸ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﮔ‰ﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ‬ ‫}‪ \label{hlabel i‬ﺍﻧ‰ﺠ‰ﺎﻡ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻨ‰ﺠ‰ﺎ‪ hlabel i ،‬ﺑ‰ﺮﭼ‰ﺴ‰ﺒ‰ﯽ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﮐ‰ﻪ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﻪﺩﻟ‰ﺨ‰ﻮﺍﻩ‪ ،‬ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺮ‬ ‫ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪ ،hlabel i‬ﺩﺍﻧﺴﺘﻦ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭﭘﯽ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺳﻮﺩﻣﻨﺪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪32 Label‬‬ ‫‪۳۳‬ﻣﻨﻈﻮﺭ ﺍﺯ ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﺳﺎﺧﺘﺎﺭﻫﺎﯾﯽ ﭼﻮﻥ ﺗﻌﺮ ﯾﻒﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﻟﻢﻫﺎ ﻭ ﮔﺰﺍﺭﻩﻫﺎ ﻫﺴﺘﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۷۱‬‬ ‫‪ ۹.۱‬ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ‬ ‫• ﺑ‰ﺮﭼ‰ﺴ‰ﺐ ‪ hlabel i‬ﻣ‰ﯽﺗ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﺪ ﺗ‰ﺮﮐ‰ﯿ‰ﺒ‰ﯽ ﺍﺯ ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻑ‪ ،‬ﺍﻋ‰ﺪﺍﺩ‪ ،‬ﻧ‰ﺸ‰ﺎﻧ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻧ‰ﻘ‰ﻄ‰ﻪﮔ‰ﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻭ ﺣ‰ﺘ‰ﯽ‬ ‫ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﯾﺎﺿﯽ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺷﺮﻁ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﻗﻮﺍﻋﺪ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭘﯿﺮ ﻭﯼ ﮐﻨﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪ hlabel i‬ﺑﻪﮔﻮﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ ﺷﻮﺩ ﮐﻪ ﺑﻪﯾﺎﺩ ﺁﻭﺭﺩﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺁﺳﺎﻥﺗﺮ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺼﻠﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ‪ Introduction‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ chap:intro‬ﻭ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺨﺸﯽ ﺑﺎ ﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫‪ Introduction‬ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺕ ‪ sec:intro‬ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﻫﺎﯼ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺒﯽ ﺑﻪﻧﻈﺮ ﻣﯽﺭﺳﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑ‰‰ﺎﯾ‰‰ﺪ ﺩﻗ‰‰ﺖ ﮐ‰‰ﺮﺩ‪ LaTEX ،‬ﻧ‰‰ﺴ‰‰ﺒ‰‰ﺖ ﺑ‰‰ﻪ ﺣ‰‰ﺮ ﻭﻑ ﮐ‰‰ﻮﭼ‰‰ﮏ ﻭ ﺑ‰‰ﺰ ﺭﮒ ﻭ ﻫ‰‰ﻤ‰‰ﭽ‰‰ﻨ‰‰ﯿ‰‰ﻦ ﻓ‰‰ﻀ‰‰ﺎﻫ‰‰ﺎﯼ‬ ‫ﺧ‰ﺎﻟ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ‪ ،hlabel i‬ﺣ‰ﺴ‰ﺎﺱ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺑ‰ﻪﻃ‰ﻮﺭ ﻣ‰ﺜ‰ﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭﺕﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ‪ Sec:intro ،sec:intro‬ﻭ‬ ‫‪ sec: intro‬ﺳﻪ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﺑﻪﺣﺴﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﺁﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫• ﺑﻬﺘﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻫﻨﮕﺎﻡ ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﻫﺮﯾﮏ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺷﯿﺎﺀ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪﯼ ﻣﻨﺎﺳﺐ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺧﺘﯿﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﻮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻧﻤﻮﻧﻪ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪ chap:‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺼﻞﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪ sec:‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪ‬ ‫‪ eqn:‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎ‪ ،‬ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪ thm:‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ ﭘﯿﺸﻮﻧﺪ ‪ fig:‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺷﮑﻞﻫﺎ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻧﮑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺩﺳﺘﻪﯼ ﺍﻭﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻭﺳﯿﻠﻪﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪\label{hlabel i‬‬ ‫ﺑ‰ﺮﭼ‰ﺴ‰ﺐﮔ‰ﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﺷ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﻣ‰ﯽﺗ‰ﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻫ‰ﺮﺟ‰ﺎﯼ ﻣ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ‪ ،‬ﺑ‰ﺎ ﮐ‰ﻤ‰ﮏ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ }‪ ،\ref{hlabel i‬ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺷ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺁﻥ‬ ‫ﺷﯽﺀ ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻃﻮﻝ ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺏ ﺧﻮﺍﻫﯿﻢ ﺩﯾﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻬﺘﺮﯾﻦ ﻣﮑﺎﻥ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ ،\label‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ‬ ‫ﻧﺸﺎﻧﻪﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ ﯾﮏ ﺷﯽﺀ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺩﺍﺭ‪ ،‬ﮐﺠﺎ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺭ ﻭﺷﻦ ﺷﺪﻥ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﯾﮏ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ ﮐﻠﯽ‪ ،‬ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺷﮑﻞ ‪ ۱۷.۱‬ﻧﻤﺎﯾﺶ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﻧﮕﺎﻩ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟ‰ﺎﻉﺩﻫ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺻ‰ﻔ‰ﺤ‰ﺎﺕ‪.‬‬ ‫ﮔ‰ﺎﻫ‰ﯽ‪ ،‬ﺟ‰ﻬ‰ﺖ ﮐ‰ﻤ‰ﮏ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺧ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﻩ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﺪﺍ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻣ‰ﻄ‰ﻠ‰ﺐ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪ ﺭﺍ ﺫﮐﺮ ﻣﯽﮐﻨﯿﻢ‪ .‬ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ \pageref{hlabel i‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﺻﻔﺤﻪﺍﯼ ﮐﻪ‬ ‫ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐ ‪ hlabel i‬ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺟﺎﯼ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ ،‬ﺩﺳﺘﺮﺳﯽ ﭘﯿﺪﺍ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ ﺑﻪ ﮔﺰﯾﻨﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻓﻬﺮﺳﺖ ﻣﻨﺎﺑﻊ‪.‬‬ ‫ﻭ ‪ ۲.۶.۴‬ﺷﺮﺡ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦﺑﺎﺭﻩ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻔﺼﻞ‪ ،‬ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶﻫﺎﯼ ‪۱.۶.۴‬‬ ‫‪۷۲‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞ ‪ ۱۷.۱‬ﻧ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﺶ ﺩﻫ‰ﻨ‰ﺪﻩﯼ ﯾ‰ﮏ ﻣ‰ﺜ‰ﺎﻝ ﮐ‰ﻠ‰ﯽ ﻣ‰ﯽﺑ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﺍﻧ‰ﻮﺍﻉ ﻣ‰ﺨ‰ﺘ‰ﻠ‰ﻒ‬ ‫ﻣ‰ﺜ‰ﺎﻝ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺍﺭﺟ‰ﺎﻉﺩﻫ‰ﯽ ﺟ‰ﺎﯼ ﮔ‰ﺮﻓ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ؛ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﻞ ﺟ‰ﺎﯼﮔ‰ﯿ‰ﺮﯼ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ \label‬ﺩﻗ‰ﺖ ﮐ‰ﻨ‰ﯿ‰ﺪ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ \eqref‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺟ‰ﺎﻉﺩﻫ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﻌ‰ﺎﺩﻟ‰ﻪﻫ‰ﺎ ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﯼ‬ ‫‪ amsmath‬ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺩﺭ ﻭﺍﻗﻊ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ }‪ \eqref{hlabel i‬ﻫﻢﺍﺭ ﺯ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ )}‪(\ref{hlabel i‬‬ ‫ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﻌﺎﺩﻟﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺷﻤﺎﺭﻩﺩﺍﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۱۰.۳‬ﻭ ﭼﮕﻮﻧﮕﯽ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﻭ‬ ‫ﺷﺒﻪ‐ﻗﻀﯿﻪﻫﺎ ﺩﺭ ﺑﺨﺶ ‪ ۱۴.۳‬ﺗﺸﺮﯾﺢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪۱۰.۱‬‬ ‫ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‬ ‫ﻭﻗﺘﯽ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮ ‪ %‬ﺑﺮﺧﻮﺭﺩ ﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﻋﻼﻣﺖ ‪ %‬ﻭ ﺁﻧﭽﻪ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺗﺎ ﭘﺎﯾﺎﻥ ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺧﻂ ﺟﺎﯼ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﻧﺎﺩﯾﺪﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺘﻪ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﻓﻀﺎﯼ ﺧﺎﻟﯽ ﺍﺑﺘﺪﺍﯼ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﺍﯾﻦ ﻣﻮﺿﻮﻉ ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻮﺍﺭﺩ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪:‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۱‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﺎﺗﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭﯼ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﻧﺸﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۲‬ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺬﻑ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﻧﺎﺧﻮﺍﺳﺘﻪ ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻪ ﺧﻂ ﺑﻌﺪﯼ ﺍﯾﺠﺎﺩ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪،‬‬ ‫‪ ‐۳‬ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﻦ ﺧ‰ﻄ‰ﻮﻁ ﻃ‰ﻮﻻﻧ‰ﯽ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺧ‰ﻄ‰ﻮﻁ ﮐ‰ﻮﺗ‰ﺎﻩﺗ‰ﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻓ‰ﺎﯾ‰ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‪ ،‬ﺁﻧ‰ﺠ‰ﺎ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ‬ ‫ﺣﺎﻟﺖ ﻋﺎﺩﯼ ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‪.‬‬ ‫‪This is an example:‬‬ ‫‪Supercalifragilisticeexpialidocious‬‬ ‫‪Helloworld‬‬ ‫‪Hello World‬‬ ‫‪This is an % stupid‬‬ ‫‪% Better: instructive <--‬‬‫\\‪example:‬‬ ‫‪Supercal%‬‬ ‫‪ifragilist%‬‬ ‫\\‪iceexpialidocious‬‬ ‫‪Hello%‬‬ ‫\\‪world‬‬ ‫‪Hello‬‬ ‫‪World‬‬ ۷۳ ‫ ﺟﻤﻼﺕ ﺗﻮﺿﯿﺤﯽ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‬۱۰.۱ \section{Analytic Functions}\label{sec:AF} If the development in this section has familiar ring, it should. \begin{dfn}\label{dfn:differentiable} A complex-valued function $f(z)$ is \emph{differentiable} at $z_0$ if the difference quotients \begin{equation}\label{eqn:derivative} \frac{f(z)-f(z_0)}{z-z_0} \end{equation} have a limit as $z\to z_0$. \end{dfn} \subsection{Chain Rule}\label{subsec:chain rule} \begin{thm}\label{thm:hain rule} Suppose that $g(z)$ is differentiable at $z_0$, and suppose that $f(w)$ is differentiable at $w_0=g(z_0)$. Then \ldots \end{thm} \subsection{Cross Reference} See section~\ref{sec:AF} and subsection~\ref{subsec:chain rule}\\ Definition~\ref{dfn:differentiable} and Theorem~\ref{thm:hain rule}\\ Equation~\eqref{eqn:derivative} 1 Analytic Functions If the development in this section has familiar ring, it should. Definition 1.1. A complex-valued function f (z) is differentiable at z0 if the difference quotients f (z) − f (z0 ) (1.1) z − z0 have a limit as z → z0 . 1.1 Chain Rule Theorem 1.2. Suppose that g(z) is differentiable at z0 , and suppose that f (w) is differentiable at w0 = g(z0 ). Then . . . 1.2 Cross Reference See section 1 and subsection 1.1 Definition 1.1 and Theorem 1.2 Equation (1.1) ‫ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺍﺭﺟﺎﻉﺩﻫﯽ‬LaTEX ‫ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺳﺎﻣﺎﻧﻪﯼ ﺑﺮﭼﺴﺐﮔﺬﺍﺭﯼ‬:۱۷.۱ ‫ﻞ‬ ِ ‫ﺷﮑ‬ www.rasekhoon.net/software ۷۴ ‫ ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬.۱‫ﻓﺼﻞ‬ .‫ ﺍﺳ‰‰ﺘ‰‰ﻔ‰‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﮐ‰‰ﺮﺩ‬comment ‫ﺑ‰‰ﺮﺍﯼ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﺗ‰‰ﻮﺿ‰‰ﯿ‰‰ﺤ‰‰ﺎﺕ ﻃ‰‰ﻮﻻﻧ‰‰ﯽ ﺑ‰‰ﻬ‰‰ﺘ‰‰ﺮ ﺍﺳ‰‰ﺖ ﺍﺯ ﻣ‰‰ﺤ‰‰ﯿ‰‰ﻂ‬ ‫ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﻣ‰ﻌ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﺮﺍﯼ‬،‫ ﻓ‰ﺮﺍﻫ‰ﻢ ﺷ‰ﺪﻩ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‬،[۳۳] ،verbatim ‫ ﺗ‰ﻮﺳ‰ﻂ ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﯼ‬comment ‫ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ‬ ‫ ﻓ‰ﺮﺍﺧ‰ﻮﺍﻧ‰ﯽ ﺷ‰ﻮﺩ ﻭ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﮐ‰ﺎﺭ ﺑ‰ﺎ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐ‰ﺮﺩﻥ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ‬verbatim ‫ﺍﺳ‰ﺘ‰ﻔ‰ﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺿ‰ﺮ ﻭﺭﯼ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ ﺑ‰ﺴ‰ﺘ‰ﻪﯼ‬ ‫\ ﻭ‬documentclass ‫ ﯾﻌﻨﯽ ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬،‫ﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‬ ِ ‫\ ﺩﺭ ﻣﻘﺪﻣﻪﯼ ﻓﺎﯾ‬usepackage{verbatim} .‫ ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‬،\begin{document} ‫ﭘﯿﺶ ﺍﺯ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ This is another \begin{comment} rather stupid, but helpful \end{comment} example for embedding comments in your document. This is another example for embedding comments in your document. ‫ ﺍﯾ‰ﻦ ﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﻮﻩ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﭘ‰ﯿ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﺪﻩﺍﯼ ﭼ‰ﻮﻥ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂﻫ‰ﺎﯼ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﻮﻝﻧ‰ﻮ ﯾ‰ﺴ‰ﯽ ﺭ ﯾ‰ﺎﺿ‰ﯽ‬،‫ﺗ‰ﻮﺟ‰ﻪ ﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﮐﺎﺭﺁﻣﺪ ﻧﯿﺴﺖ‬ ‫ ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﺁﻥ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ‬،‫ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ‬comment ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮ ﺩﺭﺑﺎﺭﻩﯼ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬ .‫ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‬،‫ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‬.‫ﻧﻤﻮﺩ‬ \documentclass{articel} \begin{document} Some text ... \begin{comment} Commented out text ... \begin{comment} Some more commented out text ... \end{comment} and some more commented out text ... \end{comment} \end{document} ‫ ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ‬LaTEX ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ‬،‫ ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﺎﻻ‬LaTEX ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ‬ LaTeX Error: \begin{document} ended by \end{comment} ‫ ﮐﺠﺎ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬.‫ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬ ۷۵ ‫ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ‬۱۱.۱ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ‬ ۱۱.۱ ‫ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﺑﺎ ﻓﺎﺻﻠﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﮔﻮﻧﺎﮔﻮﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻫﻢ ﻗﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺷﺘﻪ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﻭ‬،‫ ﺩﺭ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ‬،‫ﻫﺮﭼﻨﺪ ﻣﻤﮑﻦ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ ‫ ﻣﺘﻦ ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ ﻣﻨﻈﻢ ﻭ ﻣﺮﺗﺐ ﺩﺭ ﭘﺎﺭﺍﮔﺮﺍﻑﻫﺎ‬،‫ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ‬،‫ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺑﺎ ﻃﻮﻝ ﻣﺘﻔﺎﻭﺕ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺑﺎﺷﻨﺪ ﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ ﺑ‰ﻪ ﺑ‰ﻬ‰ﺘ‰ﺮ ﯾ‰ﻦ ﺷ‰ﯿ‰ﻮﻩ‬،LaTEX ‫ ﺍﺯ ﺳ‰ﻮﯼ‬،‫ﺣ‰ﺮ ﻭﻓ‰ﭽ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﯽ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ ﻭ ﻓ‰ﺎﺻ‰ﻠ‰ﻪﯼ ﺑ‰ﯿ‰ﻦ ﮐ‰ﻠ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﺕ ﻭ ﻃ‰ﻮﻝ ﺧ‰ﻄ‰ﻮﻁ‬ .‫ﺍﻧﺘﺨﺎﺏ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬ There is a \texttt{verbatim} environment. You may need it if write \emph{about} \LaTeX{} or some other computer program or if you have to include portions of a source file or user input. you There is a verbatim environment. You may need it if you write about LATEX or some other computer program or if you have to include portions of a source file or user input. ‫ ﮔﺎﻫﯽ ﻧﯿﺎﺯ ﺍﺳﺖ ﺣﺎﺻﻞ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻋﯿﻨﺎً ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺑﺎﺷﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ‬،‫ﺍﻣﺎ‬ ‫ ﺍﯾﻦ‬.‫ﮔﻮﯾﯿﻢ‬ ۳۴ ‫ﻟﻔﻆ‬ ‫ ﮐﻪ ﻣﺎ ﺑﻪ ﺍﯾﻦ ﻭﺿﻌﯿﺖ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ‬،‫ﺁﺭﺍﯾﺶ ﮐﻠﻤﺎﺕ ﻭ ﺧﻄﻮﻁ ﺗﻐﯿﯿﺮ ﻧﮑﻨﺪ‬ ،‫ﻭﺿﻊ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻮﺷﺘﺠﺎﺗﯽ ﺭﺥ ﻣﯽﺩﻫﺪ ﮐﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﻥ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﺮﻧﺎﻣﻪﻫﺎﯼ ﺭﺍﯾﺎﻧﻪﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‬ .‫ﻣﺎﻧﻨﺪ ﻫﻤﯿﻦ ﮐﺘﺎﺑﯽ ﮐﻪ ﭘﯿﺶ ﺭ ﻭ ﺩﺍﺭﯾﺪ‬ .‫ ﻓﺮﺍﻫﻢ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬verbatim ‫ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ‬،‫ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ‬،LaTEX ‫ﺩﺭ‬ \begin{verbatim} There is a \texttt{verbatim} environment. You may need it if write \emph{about} \LaTeX{} or some other computer program or if you have to include portions of a source file or user input. \end{verbatim} you There is a \texttt{verbatim} environment. You may need it if write \emph{about} \LaTeX{} or some other computer program or if you have to include portions of a source file or user input. you ‫ ﻋ‰ﯿ‰ﻨ‰ﺎً ﺑ‰ﻪ ﻫ‰ﻤ‰ﺎﻥ ﺷ‰ﮑ‰ﻞ ﻭ‬،‫ ﺟ‰ﺎﯼ ﮔ‰ﺮﻓ‰ﺘ‰ﻪ ﺍﺳ‰ﺖ‬verbatim ‫ ﺁﻧ‰ﭽ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ ﻣ‰ﺤ‰ﯿ‰ﻂ‬،‫ﻣ‰ﻼﺣ‰ﻈ‰ﻪ ﻣ‰ﯽﺷ‰ﻮﺩ‬ .‫ﻫﻤﺎﻥ ﺁﺭﺍﯾﺶ ﺩﺭ ﺧﺮ ﻭﺟﯽ ﻇﺎﻫﺮ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ‬ 34 Verbatim ‫‪www.rasekhoon.net/software‬‬ ‫‪۷۶‬‬ ‫ﻓﺼﻞ‪ .۱‬ﺍﺳﺎﺱ ﮐﺎﺭ‬ ‫ﻧﮑﺘﻪﯼ ﻣﻬﻢ ﺁﻥ ﺍﺳﺖ ﮐﻪ ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﻣﺤﯿﻂ ‪ verbatim‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺗﻮﺩﺭﺗﻮ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻃﻮﺭ‬ ‫ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺯﯾﺮ ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﻧﻈﺮ ﺑﮕﯿﺮﯾﺪ‪.‬‬ ‫}‪\documentclass{article‬‬ ‫}‪\begin{document‬‬ ‫‪Some text ...‬‬ ‫}‪\begin{verbatim‬‬ ‫‪Verbatim text‬‬ ‫}‪\begin{verbatim‬‬ ‫‪Some more verbatim text ...‬‬ ‫}‪\end{verbatim‬‬ ‫‪and some more verbatim text ...‬‬ ‫}‪\end{verbatim‬‬ ‫}‪\end{document‬‬ ‫ﭘﺲ ﺍﺯ ﺍﺟﺮﺍ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ‪ LaTEX‬ﺭ ﻭﯼ ﻓﺎﯾﻞ ﻭﺭ ﻭﺩﯼ ﺑﺎﻻ‪ ،‬ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎﯼ‬ ‫}‪LaTeX Error: \begin{document} ended by \end{verbatim‬‬ ‫ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ‪ .‬ﮐﺠﺎ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺭﺥ ﺩﺍﺩﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ؟‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‐ﺧﻄﯽ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﺮﺍﯼ ﻋﺒﺎﺭﺗﯽ‬ ‫ﮐﻪ ﺍﺯ ﯾﮏ ﺧﻂ ﺗﺠﺎﻭﺯ ﻧﻤﯽﮐﻨﺪ‪ ،‬ﺑﻪ ﺻﻮﺭﺕ ﺩﺭ ﻭﻥ‐ﺧﻄﯽ‪ ،‬ﺍﻣﮑﺎﻥﭘﺬﯾﺮ ﺍﺳﺖ‪ .‬ﺍﯾﻦ ﮐﺎﺭ ﺑﺎ ﺍﺳﺘﻔﺎﺩﻩ ﺍﺯ‬ ‫ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \verb‬ﺍﻧﺠﺎﻡ ﻣﯽﺷﻮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫‪$ \sin^2 x + \cos^2 x = 1 $‬‬ ‫|‪\verb|$ \sin^2 x + \cos^2 x = 1 $‬‬ ‫ﺩﻗﺖ ﮐﻨﯿﺪ‪ ،‬ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \verb‬ﺑﯿﻦ ﺩﻭ ﻋﻼﻣﺖ | | ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﺷﺪﻩ ﺍﺳﺖ ﻭ ﺑﻪﻋﻼﻭﻩ ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ‬ ‫ﺁﺭﮔﻮﻣﺎﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ ‪ \verb‬ﺭﺍ ﺩﺭ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﯾﺎ ﺑﯿﺸﺘﺮ ﺍﺯ ﺩﻭ ﺧﻂ ﻭﺍﺭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪.‬‬ ‫ﺣ‰ﺎﻝ ﺍ ﮔ‰ﺮ ﻋ‰ﺒ‰ﺎﺭﺗ‰ﯽ ﮐ‰ﻪ ﺩﺭ ﺁﺭﮔ‰ﻮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ﻓ‰ﺮﻣ‰ﺎﻥ ‪ \verb‬ﻗ‰ﺮﺍﺭ ﺩﺍﺭﺩ ﺧ‰ﻮﺩ ﺷ‰ﺎﻣ‰ﻞ ﮐ‰ﺮﺍ ﮐ‰ﺘ‰ﺮ | ﺑ‰ﺎﺷ‰ﺪ‪ ،‬ﺩﯾ‰ﮕ‰ﺮ‬ ‫ﻧﻤﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺁﻥ ﺭﺍ ﺑﯿﻦ ﻋﻼﻣﺖﻫﺎﯼ | | ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩ ﮐﺮﺩ‪ .‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺜﺎﻝ‪ ،‬ﺑﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﮐﺮﺩﻥ ﻓﺮﻣﺎﻥ‬ ‫|‪\verb|$ |\sin x| \leq |x| $‬‬ ‫ﺍﺯ ﺳﻮﯼ ‪ LaTEX‬ﭘﯿﻐﺎﻡ ﺧﻄﺎ ﺻﺎﺩﺭ ﻣﯽﮔﺮﺩﺩ؛‬ ‫‪Missing $ inserted‬‬ ‫ﺩﺭ ﺍﯾﻦ ﺣﺎﻟﺖ‪ ،‬ﻣﯽﺗﻮﺍﻥ ﺍﺯ ﮐﺮﺍﮐﺘﺮﻫﺎﯼ ﺩﯾﮕﺮﯼ ﭼﻮﻥ ‪ +‬ﻭ ‪ -‬ﺑﻪﻋﻨﻮﺍﻥ ﻣﺤﺪﻭﺩﮐﻨﻨﺪﻩ ﺑﻬﺮﻩ ﮔﺮﻓﺖ‪.‬‬ ۷۷ \verb+ |\sin(x)| \leq |x| + \\ \verb- |x| + |y| = 1 - \\ \verb@ |x| + |y| - |z| @ \\ \verb| @| ‫ ﺣﺮ ﻭﻓﭽﯿﻨﯽ ﻟﻔﻆ ﺑﻪ ﻟﻔﻆ‬۱۱.۱ |\sin(x)| \leq |x| |x| + |y| = 1 |x| + |y| - |z| @